all | frequencies |
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
Manual | Users Manual | 1.33 MiB | August 06 2008 / September 06 2008 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
|
User Guide | Users Manual | 1.85 MiB | / November 01 2008 | |||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | August 06 2008 / September 06 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | August 06 2008 / September 06 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | August 06 2008 / September 06 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | August 06 2008 / September 06 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | August 06 2008 / September 06 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | External Photos | / November 01 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Internal Photos | January 10 2007 / November 01 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | January 10 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | / November 01 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Setup Photos | / April 01 2008 | ||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Test Report |
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Manual | Users Manual | 1.33 MiB | August 06 2008 / September 06 2008 |
Nokia N82 User Guide 9205734 Issue 2.1 Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Black DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY 2008 Nokia. All rights reserved. Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-313 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at www.nokia.com/phones/declaration_of_conformity/. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nseries, N82, Navi, N-Gage, and Visual Radio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners Reproduction, transfer, distribution, or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd 1998-2008. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1998-2008. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps software are copyright 2002-2008 The FreeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. Cyan Cyan Magenta Yellow Black Cyan Cyan Magenta Yellow Black The third-party applications provided with your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applications, or the information in the applications or these materials. Nokia does not provide any warranty for the third-party applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT THE APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of particular products and applications and services for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availability of language options. Export controls This device may contain commodities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 9205734/Issue 2.1 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s t n e t n o C Contents For your safety ............................................7 About your device...........................................................8 Network services.............................................................9 Enhancements, batteries, and chargers.......................9 Get connected............................................11 Useful information.....................................12 Help.................................................................................12 Get started.....................................................................12 Extended user guide.....................................................12 Additional applications................................................12 Software updates..........................................................12 Settings..........................................................................13 Access codes..................................................................13 Prolong battery life.......................................................14 Free memory.................................................................15 Your device.................................................16 Welcome........................................................................16 Transfer content............................................................16 Display indicators..........................................................17 Fast downloading.........................................................18 Shortcuts........................................................................19 Multimedia menu..........................................................19 Mobile Search................................................................20 Games.............................................................................20 Headset..........................................................................21 Volume and loudspeaker control................................21 Offline profile.................................................................21 Camera.......................................................23 About the camera.........................................................23 Image capture...............................................................23 Video recording.............................................................29 Camera settings.............................................................31 Gallery........................................................35 View and organise files................................................35 Images and video clips.................................................36 Edit images....................................................................38 Edit videos.....................................................................39 TV-out mode..................................................................39 Presentations................................................................40 Print images..................................................................40 Share images and videos online..................................41 Home network...............................................................42 Positioning (GPS)........................................46 About GPS.......................................................................46 GPS receiver...................................................................47 About satellite signals..................................................47 Maps...............................................................................48 Landmarks.....................................................................53 GPS data.........................................................................53 Web browser..............................................56 Browse the web............................................................56 Navigate pages..............................................................57 Web feeds and blogs....................................................57 Widgets..........................................................................58 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Bookmarks.....................................................................58 Empty the cache............................................................59 End the connection.......................................................59 Connection security......................................................59 Web settings..................................................................60 Connections................................................62 Wireless LAN..................................................................62 Connection manager....................................................64 Bluetooth connectivity.................................................64 USB..................................................................................67 PC connections..............................................................68 Nokia Video Centre.....................................69 Find and view videos....................................................69 Internet videos..............................................................70 Play downloaded videos..............................................70 Transfer videos from your PC.......................................70 Settings..........................................................................71 Music folder................................................72 Music player...................................................................72 Nokia Music Store..........................................................76 Media folder...............................................77 RealPlayer .....................................................................77 Activation keys..............................................................78 Personalise your device.............................79 Themes...........................................................................79 Profilesset tones........................................................79 Modify the standby mode............................................80 Modify the main menu.................................................80 Messaging..................................................81 Messaging main view...................................................81 Write and send messages............................................81 Messaging inbox...........................................................83 Mailbox...........................................................................84 Messaging settings.......................................................85 s t n e t n o C Make calls...................................................90 Voice calls.......................................................................90 Voice and video mailboxes..........................................90 Answer or decline a call................................................90 Make a video call...........................................................91 Answer or decline a video call.....................................92 Internet calls..................................................................92 Log..................................................................................94 Contacts (phonebook)................................95 Save and edit names and numbers.............................95 Add ringing tones for contacts....................................95 Copy contacts.................................................................96 Applications folder.....................................97 Calculator.......................................................................97 Application manager....................................................97 Tools folder..............................................100 File manager................................................................100 Memory card tool........................................................100 Settings....................................................101 General settings..........................................................101 Phone settings............................................................105 Connection settings....................................................107 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s t n e t n o C Battery information.................................111 Charging and discharging..........................................111 Nokia battery authentication guidelines.................112 Care and maintenance.............................114 Disposal........................................................................115 Additional safety information.................116 Small children..............................................................116 Operating environment..............................................116 Medical devices...........................................................116 Vehicles........................................................................117 Potentially explosive environments.........................118 Emergency calls...........................................................118 Certification information (SAR)..................................119 Index........................................................120 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna areas unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. y t e f a s r u o y r o F 7 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y t e f a s r u o y r o F BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. SettingsPhoneNetworkNetwork modeDual mode. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Not all networks support all features offered in this device. For instance, video calls, video sharing, push-
to-talk, and instant messaging are not compatible with the networks in the United States of America. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports internet connections and other methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and applications, and other harmful content. Exercise caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests, download content, and accept installations only from trustworthy sources. To increase the security of your devices, consider installing, using, and regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. The 2100 MHz UMTS (HSDPA) is not used in North America and has been turned off in your device. To activate the 2100 MHz UMTS frequency for use outside North America, press
, and select Tools 8 Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. During extended operation, such as an active video sharing session or high-speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. y t e f a s r u o y r o F Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. You may also access other third-party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take precautions for security or content. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the DC-4, AC-4, or AC-5 charger and from an AC-1, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, or LCH-12 charger when used with the CA-44 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-6MT. 9 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. y t e f a s r u o y r o F 10 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Get connected Nokia N82 supports the following connectivity methods:
2G and 3G networks
Bluetooth connectivity to transfer files and connect to compatible enhancements. See
"Bluetooth connectivity", p. 64.
Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) to connect to compatible headsets, headphones, TVs, or home stereo sets. See "TV-out mode", p. 39.
USB data cable to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See
"USB", p. 67.
Wireless LAN (WLAN) to connect to the internet and WLAN enabled devices. See "Wireless LAN", p. 62.
GPS to connect to GPS satellites to measure your location. See "Positioning (GPS)", p. 46. d e t c e n n o c t e G 11 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i l u f e s U 12 Useful information Model number: Nokia N82-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N82. For local services and warranty information, please refer to the separate booklet. Help Your device has context-sensitive help. When an application is open, select OptionsHelp to access help for the current view. When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold To open help from the main menu, select Tools UtilitiesHelp. Select the desired application to view its help topics. Get started See the get started guide for keys and parts information, instructions for setting up the device and for other essential information. Extended user guide An extended version of this user guide is available on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Some applications or functionalities, for example, the applications in the Office folder, are explained only in the extended user guide. Additional applications There are various applications provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers that help you do more with your device. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance. You may be able to request these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC application. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Software Updater application and a Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i l u f e s U compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista operating system, broadband internet access, and a compatible data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokiausa.com/softwareupdate in the United States or www.latinoamerica.nokia.com/nsu in Latin America. Tip: To check the software version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mode. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile internet settings automatically configured in the device, based upon your network service provider information. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service providers as a special message. You can change the general settings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. See "General settings", p. 101. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider.
Personal identification number (PIN) code This code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it.
UPIN code This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones.
PIN2 code This code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your device.
Lock code (also known as security code) This code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorised use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345. To avoid unauthorised use of your device, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. Try entering the code only once, if you forget the code. If the code you entered is not correct, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider for further instructions.
Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 code These codes (8 digits) are required to 13 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i l u f e s U 14 change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your device.
UPUK code This code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Prolong battery life Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, note the following:
Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power. Turn Bluetooth technology off when you do not need it.
Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background.
If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet data connection When needed.
The Maps application downloads new map information when you scroll to new areas on the map, which increases the demand on battery power. You can prevent the automatic download of new maps. See "Maps", p. 48.
If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeatedly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the network settings, the device searches for the UMTS network. You can set the device to use only the GSM network. See "Network settings", p. 106.
The backlight of the display increases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change the time-out after which the backlight is switched off, and adjust the light sensor that observes lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness. See
"Personalisation settings", p. 101. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power. To close the applications you do not use, press and hold
, scroll to an application in the list, and press C. Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Music player, select it from the list and Options Exit. Free memory Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if the device or the memory card (if available) memory is low. To view the types of data you have in the device and how much memory the different data types consume, press OptionsMemory details. The amount of available memory is shown in Free memory.
, and select ToolsFile mgr. To free device memory, transfer data to a compatible memory card (if available) or to a compatible PC. To remove data to free memory, use File manager to delete files you no longer need, or go to the respective application. You can remove the following:
Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e-mail messages from the mailbox
Saved web pages
Contact information
Calendar notes
Applications shown in Application manager that you do not need
Installation files (.sis or .sisx) of applications you have installed to a compatible memory card (if available).
Images and video clips in Gallery. Back up the files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. If you are deleting multiple items and one of the following notes is shown, delete items, one by one, beginning with the smallest item:
Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first.
Memory low. Delete some data from phone memory. n o i t a m r o f n i l u f e s U 15 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c i v e d r u o Y 16 Your device Welcome Transfer content When you switch on your device, the Welcome application is displayed. Select from the following:
Sett. wizard to configure various settings, such as e-mail. For more information on the Settings wizard application, see the guides available at the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website.
Switch to transfer content, such as contacts and calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. See "Transfer content", p. 16. There may also be a demonstration about your device available in the Welcome application.
, To access the Welcome application later, press and select ToolsUtilitiesWelcome. You can also access the individual applications from their menu locations. With the Switch application, you can transfer content, such as contacts, between two compatible Nokia devices using Bluetooth connectivity. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between the other device and your device. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be powered on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatically activated. Transfer content 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Switch in the Welcome application, or press ToolsUtilitiesSwitch.
, and select 2. Select the connection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both devices must support the selected connection type. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c i v e d r u o Y 3. If you select Bluetooth connectivity: To have The device is being used in a UMTS network your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue. Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are asked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK. Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK. The devices are now paired. See "Pair devices", p. 66. For some device models, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To install the Switch application on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4. From your device, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. Once the transfer has started, you can cancel it and continue later.
(network service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to silent, and the message alert tone and e-mail alert tone are set to off. The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). Transferring time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service). If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A compatible headset is connected to the device. Display indicators device. A compatible TV out cable is connected to the The device is being used in a GSM network
(network service). A compatible text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active (network service). 17 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c i v e d r u o Y A GPRS packet data connection is active (network indicates the connection is on hold and service). that a connection is available. Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indicator is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that supports EGPRS (network service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the network, but your device is not necessarily using EGPRS in the data transfer. A UMTS packet data connection is active (network indicates the connection is on hold and service). that a connection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). the connection is on hold and is available. See "Fast downloading", p. 18. indicates that a connection You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). See "About WLAN", p. 62. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. See "Bluetooth A USB connection is active. Fast downloading
) is a network service High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the device is connected to a UMTS network that supports HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, and browser pages through the cellular network may be faster. An
. See active HSDPA connection is indicated by
"Display indicators", p. 17. You can activate or deactivate support for HSDPA in the device settings. See "Packet data settings", p. 109. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the download speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. 18 connectivity", p. 64. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Shortcuts When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, #, and * to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press 2 to open Messaging, or # to open the application or folder in the corresponding location in the menu. Leaving applications running in the To switch between open applications, press and hold background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To open Gallery, press once. To open the multimedia menu to view the multimedia content you have used most frequently in your device, press the multimedia key. To start a web connection (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0. In many applications, to view the most used option items, press the scroll key. To change the profile, press the power key, and select a profile. To switch between the General and Silent profiles, in the standby mode, press and hold #. If you have two phone lines (network service), this action switches between the two lines. To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 1. To open the last dialled numbers list, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key. e c i v e d r u o Y Multimedia menu With the multimedia menu, you can view your most frequently used multimedia content. The selected content is shown in the appropriate application. 1. To open or close the multimedia menu, press the multimedia key. 2. To browse the tiles, scroll left or right. The tiles are the following:
Music Enter Music player and the Now playing view, browse your songs and play lists, or download and manage podcasts.
Gallery View your last taken picture, start a slide 19 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black show of your images, or view media files in albums. content in your device, such as calendar entries, e-
mail, and other messages. e c i v e d r u o Y
Games Try out N-Gage games.
Maps View your favourite locations in the Maps application.
Internet View your favourite web links in the browser.
Contacts Add your own contacts, send messages, or make voice calls. To add a new contact to an empty position on the list, press the scroll key, and select a contact. To send a message, in the multimedia menu, select a contact, and Send text message or Send multimedia msg.. 3. To scroll up or down in a tile, press the scroll key up or down. To select items, press the scroll key. To change the order of the tiles, select Options Arrange tiles. To return to the multimedia menu from an open application, press the multimedia key. Mobile Search Press
, and select Search. Use Mobile Search to get access to search engines and find and connect to local services, websites, images, and mobile content. You can also search 20 For more information, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Games You can play high-quality multiplayer N-Gage games with your device. Your device includes either one of the following applications in the main menu:
Discover N-Gage application With this preview application you can get information about the upcoming N-Gage gaming experience, try out game demos, and download and install the full N-Gage application when it becomes available.
N-Gage application The full featured application gives you access to the complete N-
Gage experience replacing the Discover N-Gage application in the menu. You can find new games, try and buy games, find other players, and access scores, events, chat, and more. Some features may not be available at the time of software installation on your device, check www.n-gage.com for software updates. For the full N-Gage experience, you need internet access on your device, either through the cellular network or wireless LAN. Contact your service provider for more information on data services. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c i v e d r u o Y For more information, visit www.n-gage.com. use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay special attention to volume levels. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may need to select the cable mode. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. If a headset does not include a microphone, for handsfree phone calls, use such a headset with a compatible remote control unit or the microphone of the device. You can also connect a compatible TV-out cable to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) of your device. Do not connect products that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select OptionsActivate loudspeaker. To turn off the loudspeaker, select Options Activate handset. Offline profile To activate the offline profile, press the power key briefly, and select Offline. 21 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c i v e d r u o Y The offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless network. When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. in When the offline profile is active, you can use your device without a SIM card. Important: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. To leave the offline profile, press the power key briefly, and select another profile. The device re-
enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). 22 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Camera About the camera Image capture a r e m a C Your Nokia N82 has two cameras, a high resolution camera on the back of the device (the main camera, up to 5 megapixels, in landscape mode) and a lower resolution camera on the front (the secondary camera in portrait mode). You can use both cameras to take still pictures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixels. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clips are automatically saved in Images & videos in Gallery. The cameras produce .jpeg images. Video clips are recorded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension (sharing quality). See "Video settings", p. 33. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or by using other connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity or wireless LAN connection. You can also upload them to a compatible online album. See
"Share images and videos online", p. 41. To activate the main camera, open the lens cover by using the camera activation switch. To activate the main camera when the lens cover is already open, press and hold the capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfinder displays the following:
1 Capture mode indicator 2 Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during image capture. See "Active toolbar", p. 24. 23 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C 24 3 Battery charge level indicator 4 Image resolution indicator, which indicates the quality of the image. The quality of a digitally zoomed picture is lower than that of an unzoomed picture. 5 Image counter, which displays the estimated number of images you can capture using the current image quality setting and memory in use. The counter is not displayed during image capture.
) and memory card (
6 The device memory (
indicators, which show where images are saved.
) 7 Xenon flash indicator, which is shown blinking only when the xenon flash is charging. 8 GPS indicator, which is only shown when Record location is activated in the camera settings. See "Location information", p. 26. Active toolbar The active toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and after taking a picture or recording a video. Scroll to items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. You can also define when the active toolbar is visible on the display. The settings in the active toolbar return to the default settings after you close the camera. To view the active toolbar before and after taking a picture or recording a video, select Options Show icons. To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select OptionsHide icons. Only the capture mode and battery level indicators are shown on the display. To activate the active toolbar, press the scroll key. The toolbar is visible for 5 seconds. Before taking a picture or recording a video, in the active toolbar, select from the following:
to switch between the video and image modes to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-timer (images only). to activate the sequence mode (images only). to select a colour effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance to adjust the exposure compensation (images only) to adjust sharpness (images only) to adjust contrast (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The icons change to reflect the current status of the setting. The available options vary depending on the capture mode and view you are in. See "After taking a picture", p. 26. See "After recording a video", p. 31. The active toolbar in Gallery has different options. See "Active toolbar", p. 36. Take pictures Before taking a picture, note the following:
You cannot take pictures until the xenon flash is fully charged, unless you have set the flash to Off. When the flash is charging, blinks on the display. Charging the xenon flash usually takes a couple of seconds.
To make lighting and colour adjustments, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar. See
"Setup settingsadjust colour and lighting", p. 32. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings.
To free memory for new pictures, transfer files to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for example, and delete the files from your device. The device informs you when the memory is full, and asks whether you want to change the memory in use. When taking a picture, note the following:
Use both hands to keep the camera still.
The quality of a digitally zoomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture.
The camera goes into the battery saving mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue taking pictures, press the capture key. To take a picture, do the following:
1. If the camera is in the video mode, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 2. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key halfway down (main camera only, not available in landscape and sports scenes). The green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, the red focus indicator appears. Release the capture key, and press it halfway down again. You can, however, take the picture without locking the focus. 3. To take a picture, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved. To zoom in or out when taking a picture, use the zoom key in your device. a r e m a C 25 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C Tip: To open Gallery and view the pictures you have taken, press device twice. on the side of your To activate the front camera, select OptionsUse secondary camera. To take a picture, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. To leave the camera open in the background and
. To return to the use other applications, press camera, press and hold the capture key. After taking a picture Select the following from the active toolbar
(available only if you select Show captured imageOn in the still image camera settings):
If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete (
To send the image using a multimedia message, e-mail, or other connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity, press the call key, or select Send (
messages", p. 81. This option is not available during an active call.
). See "Write and send You can also send the image to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller (
(only available during an active call).
) 26
To tag images to the print basket for later
). printing, select Add to Print basket (
To send the image to a compatible online album,
(available only if you have set up an select account for a compatible online album). See
"Share images and videos online", p. 41. To zoom in an image after taking it, press to open the image in Gallery, and select the zooming option from the options list. To use the image as wallpaper in the active standby, select OptionsSet as wallpaper. To set the image as a call image for a contact, select OptionsSet as contact call img.Assign to contact. To return to the viewfinder to capture a new image, press the capture key. Location information Add location information automatically to pictures when taking them. You can use this information, for example, in Gallery to view the location where a picture was taken. To set the camera to add location information to pictures, select OptionsSettingsRecord locationYes. The following location information indicators are shown at the bottom of the display:
Location information is unavailable. If the GPS finds a satellite connection within several Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black minutes, the indicator changes to adds the current positioning information to all pictures that you took during that time
. The device
Location information is available and added to all pictures you take. In Gallery, pictures with location information are indicated by
. Flash The flash is available only in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a xenon flash for low light conditions. The xenon flash is not available in the sports scene mode or when Burst is selected in the sequence mode. You cannot take pictures if the xenon flash is not fully charged, unless you have set the flash to Off. blinks on the display. When the flash is charging, Charging the xenon flash usually takes a couple of seconds. The following flash modes are available for the still image camera: Automatic (
), Red-eye (
), and Off (
), On
). To change the flash mode, in the active toolbar, select the desired flash mode. a r e m a C Scenes Scenes are only available in the main camera. A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the current environment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. The default scene in the image mode is Auto, and in the video mode Automatic (both indicated with
). To change the scene, in the active toolbar, select Scene modes and a scene. To make your own scene suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined, and select OptionsChange. In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and colour settings. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, press Back. To activate your own scene, scroll to User defined, press the scroll key, and select Select. Take pictures in a sequence The sequence mode is available only in the main camera. The xenon flash is only available in the sequence mode if you define a time interval for taking pictures. 27 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C To set the camera to take six pictures or the desired number of pictures in sequence (if enough memory is available), in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode. To take six pictures, select Burst. To capture the pictures, press the capture key. To take two or more pictures in a sequence, select the desired time interval. To capture pictures using the selected time interval, press the capture key. To stop taking pictures, select Cancel. The number of pictures taken depends on the available memory. After you take the pictures in the burst mode, they are shown in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press the scroll key to open it. If you used a time interval, only the last taken picture is shown on the display. You can view the other pictures in Images
& videos in Gallery. You can also use the sequence mode with the self-
timer. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. To switch off the sequence mode, in the active toolbar, select Sequence modeSingle shot. 28 You in the pictureself-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer2 seconds, 10 seconds, or 20 seconds. To activate the self-timer, select Activate. The device beeps when the timer is running and the quadrangle blinks just before the image capture. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the active toolbar, select Self timerOff. Tip: In the active toolbar, select Self timer 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Tips on taking good photographs Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quality. The camera has several picture quality modes. Use the highest setting to make sure that the camera produces the best picture quality available. Note however, that better picture quality requires more storage space. For multimedia message (MMS) and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use the smallest Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black picture quality mode optimised for MMS sending. You can define the quality in the camera settings. See "Still image camera settings", p. 31.
Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too much contrast. Background Use a simple background. For portraits and other pictures with people, avoid having your subject in front of a cluttered, complex background that may distract attention from the subject. Move the camera, or the subject, when these conditions cannot be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer portraits. Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your pictures by placing objects in the foreground. If the foreground object is too close to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the source, amount, and direction of light can change photographs dramatically. Here are some typical lighting conditions:
Light source behind the subject. Avoid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the subject or visible in the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted light effects.
Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause the subjects to squint their eyes. The contrast may also be too high.
Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy day or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording To activate the main camera, open the lens cover by using the camera activation switch. To activate the main camera when the lens cover is already open, press and hold the capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Video capture indicators The video viewfinder displays the following:
a r e m a C 29 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C 30 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Audio mute on indicator 3 Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during recording. See "Active toolbar", p. 24. 4 The battery charge level indicator 5 Video quality indicator that indicates whether the quality of the video is TV high quality, TV normal quality, E-mail high quality, E-mail norm. quality, or Sharing quality 6 The video clip file type 7 Total available video recording time. When you are recording, the current video length indicator also shows the elapsed time and time remaining. 8 The device memory (
indicators that show where videos are saved
) and memory card (
) 9 The video stabilisation is turned on (
"Video settings", p. 33.
). See To display all viewfinder indicators, select OptionsShow icons. Select Hide icons to display only the video status indicators, and during the recording, the available record time, zoom bar when zooming, and the selection keys. Record videos Before recording a video, note the following:
To make lighting and colour adjustments, scroll through the active toolbar. See "Setup settings adjust colour and lighting", p. 32.
To free memory for new video clips, transfer files to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for example, and remove the files from your device. The device informs you when the memory is full, and asks whether you want to change the memory in use. To record a video, do the following:
1. If the camera is in the image mode, select the video mode from the active toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the capture key. The red record icon (
indicating that recording has started.
) is shown and a tone sounds, 3. To pause recording at any time, press Pause. Video recording automatically stops if recording is set to pause and there are no keypresses within a minute. Select Continue to resume recording. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To zoom in or out of the subject, use the zoom key in your device. be able to send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. 4. To stop recording, select Stop. The video clip is automatically saved to the Images & videos folder of Gallery. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. To activate the front camera, select OptionsUse secondary camera. To start recording a video, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select the following from the active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set to On in the video settings):
To immediately play the video clip you just recorded, select Play (
If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete (
To send the video clip using a multimedia message, e-mail, or other connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity, press the call key, or select Send (
messages", p. 81. See "Send data using Bluetooth connectivity", p. 66. This option is not available during an active call. You may not
). See "Write and send a r e m a C You can also send the video clip to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller (
(only available during an active call).
To upload the video clip to a compatible online album, select
(only available if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). See "Share images and videos online", p. 41.
To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the camera:
setup settings and main settings. The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To adjust the setup settings, use the options in the active toolbar. See
"Setup settingsadjust colour and lighting", p. 32. To change the main settings, in the image or video mode, select Options Settings. Still image camera settings To change the main settings, in the image mode, select OptionsSettings and from the following:
31 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C 32
Image quality Select Print 5M - Large
Extended digital zoom (main camera only)
(2592x1944 resolution), Print 3M - Medium
(2048x1536 resolution), Print 2M - Medium
(1600x1200 resolution), E-mail 0.8M - Med.
(1024x768 resolution), or MMS 0.3M - Small
(640x480 resolution). The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. If you want to print the image, select Print 5M -
Large, Print 3M - Medium, or Print 2M -
Medium. If you want to send it using e-mail, select E-mail 0.8M - Med.. To send the image using a multimedia message, select MMS 0.3M -
Small. These resolutions are only available in the main camera.
Add to album Select whether you want to save the image to a certain album in Gallery. If you select Yes, a list of available albums opens.
Record location To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select Yes. Receiving a GPS signal may take time or the signal may not be available.
Show captured image Select On if you want to see the captured image after it is taken or Off if you want to continue taking pictures immediately.
Default image name Define the default name for the captured images. On (continuous) allows the zoom increments to be smooth and continuous between digital and extended digital zoom, On (paused) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and extended digital step point, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution.
Capture tone Select the tone you want to hear when you take a picture.
Memory in use Select where you want to store your images.
Rotate image Select whether you want images that are captured when the device is held upright to be rotated when you open them in Gallery.
Restore camera settings Select Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. Setup settingsadjust colour and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colours and lighting more accurately or to add effects to your pictures or videos, scroll through the active toolbar, and select from the following options:
Flash mode (
) (images only) Select the desired flash mode. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
Colour tone (
) Select a colour effect from the list.
White balance (
) Select the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately.
Exposure compensation (
) (images only) If you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to +1 or +2 to compensate the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2.
Sharpness (
) (images only) Adjust the sharpness of the image.
Contrast (
) (images only) Adjust the difference between the lightest and darkest parts of the image.
Light sensitivity (
) (images only) Increase the light sensitivity in low light conditions to decrease the risk of images that are too dark. The screen display changes to match any settings you make so that you see how the change affects the pictures or videos. The available settings vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings are camera specific; if you change the settings in the secondary camera, the settings in the main camera do not change. The setup settings are also shooting mode specific; if you change the settings in the image mode, the settings in the video mode do not change. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined setup settings. The setup settings return to the default settings when you close the camera. If you select a new scene, the colour and lighting settings are replaced by the selected scene. You can change the setup settings after selecting a scene if needed. For more information on the scenes, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Video settings To change the main settings, in the video mode, select OptionsSettings and from the following:
Video quality Set the quality of the video clip to TV high quality, TV normal quality, E-mail high quality, E-mail norm. quality (standard quality for playback through your handset), or Sharing quality. If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select TV high quality or TV normal quality, which have VGA resolution (640x480) and the .mp4 file format. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. To send the video clip using a multimedia message, a r e m a C 33 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black select Sharing quality, which has QCIF resolution and the .3gp file format.
Video stabilisation Select On to reduce camera shaking when recording the video.
Audio recording Select Mute if you do not want to record sound.
Add to album Select whether you want to add the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery. Select Yes to open a list of available albums.
Show captured video Select whether you want the first frame of the recorded video clip to be displayed after the recording stops. Select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or OptionsPlay (secondary camera) to view the video clip.
Default video name Define the default name for the captured video clips.
Memory in use Select where you want to store your videos.
Restore camera settings Select Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. a r e m a C 34 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Gallery To store and organise your images, video clips, sound clips, and streaming links, or share your files with other compatible Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) devices through wireless LAN (WLAN), press
, and select Gallery. Tip: If you are in another application, to view the last saved picture or video clip in Gallery, press enter the Images & videos folder main view, press the review key again. on the side of your device. To View and organise files Press
, and select Gallery. In Gallery, select Images & videos Sound clips Presentations key to open it.
, Streaming links
, or All files
, Tracks
, and press the scroll You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. You can also create albums and mark, copy, and add items to albums. See
"Albums", p. 37. Files stored on your compatible memory card
(if inserted) are indicated with
. To open a file, press the scroll key. Video clips, .ram files, and streaming links open and play in RealPlayer, and music and sound clips in Music player. See "RealPlayer ", p. 77. See
"Music player", p. 72. To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and OptionsMove and copyCopy to memory card or Move to memory card, or Copy to phone mem. or Move to phone mem.. y r e l l a G 35 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G Images and video clips View images and videos
, and To view your images and video clips, press select GalleryImages & videos. Pictures taken and video clips recorded with the camera of your device are stored in Images &
videos. Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Bluetooth connectivity. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Gallery or in the RealPlayer, you must first save it. The video clips saved in Nokia Video Centre are not shown in Images & videos in Gallery. See "Nokia Video Centre", p. 69. The images and video clip files in Images & videos are in a loop and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. 36 To open a file, press the scroll key. When an image is opened, to zoom in the image, press the zoom key on the side of your device. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. If you want the display to be automatically rotated based on the orientation of the device, set the display rotation on in the settings. See
"Personalisation settings", p. 101. To edit a video clip or a photo, select Options Edit. was To see where an image marked with captured, select OptionsShow on map. Active toolbar In the Images & videos folder, you can use the active toolbar as a shortcut to different tasks. The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip. In the active toolbar, scroll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. The settings in the active toolbar return to the default settings after you close the camera. If you want the active toolbar to always be visible on the display, select OptionsShow icons. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select OptionsHide icons. To activate the active toolbar, press the scroll key. Select from the following:
to play the selected video clip to send the selected image or video clip to upload the selected image or video clip to a compatible online album (only available if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). See "Share images and videos online", p. 41. or to add or remove an image from the print basket. to print the viewed image to start a slide show of your images to delete the selected image or video clip The available options may vary depending on the view you are in. Albums With albums, you can conveniently manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list in Gallery, select Images & videosOptions AlbumsView albums. To create a new album, in the albums list view, select OptionsNew album. y r e l l a G To add a picture or a video clip to an album in Gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select OptionsAlbumsAdd to album. A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Images & videos in Gallery. To remove a file from an album, open the album, scroll to the file, and press C. The file is not deleted from Images & videos in Gallery. Slide show To view your images as a slide show, select an image in Gallery, and Start slide show (
active toolbar. The slide show starts from the selected file.
) in the To view only the selected images as a slide show, select OptionsMark/UnmarkMark to mark images, and OptionsSlide showStart to start the slide show. Select from the following:
Pause to pause the slide show
Continue to resume the slide show, if paused
End to close the slide show To browse the images, scroll left or right. 37 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G Before starting the slide show, adjust the slide show settings. Select OptionsSlide show Settings, and from the following:
Music to add sound to the slide show. Select On or Off.
Song to select a music file from the list
Delay between slides to adjust the tempo of the slide show
Zoom and pan to make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and let Gallery randomly zoom in and out in the images To decrease or increase the volume during the slide show, use the volume key in your device. Edit images Image editor To edit the pictures after taking them or the ones already saved in Gallery, select OptionsEdit. The image editor opens. Select OptionsApply effect to open a grid where you can select different edit options indicated by small icons. You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. 38 Crop image To crop an image, select OptionsApply effectCrop, and a predefined aspect ratio from the list. To crop the image size manually, select Manual. If you select Manual, a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set. Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adjust the first selected area, select Back. The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefined aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected area, press the scroll key. To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options Apply effectRed eye reduction. Move the cross onto the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scroll key. To reduce the redness, press the scroll key. When you finish editing the image, press Done. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To save the changes, and return to Images &
videos, press Back. Useful shortcuts You can use the following shortcuts when editing images:
To view a full-screen image, press *. To return to the normal view, press * again.
To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1.
To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0.
To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or right. Edit videos To edit video clips in Gallery, scroll to a video clip, and select OptionsEdit and an editing option. The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. TV-out mode To view the captured images and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable. Before viewing the images and video clips on TV, you may need to configure the TV-out settings for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See
"Enhancement settings", p. 102. y r e l l a G To watch images and video clips on TV, do the following:
1. Connect a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the video input of a compatible TV. 2. Connect the other end of the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device. 3. You may need to select the cable mode. 4. Press
, and select GalleryImages &
videos and the file you want to view. The images are shown in the image viewer, and the video clips are played in RealPlayer. All audio, including the active calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. 39 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G For all applications other than the Images &
videos folder in Gallery and RealPlayer, the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3, respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9. To switch between full and normal screen, press *. The opened image is displayed in full-screen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on the TV, zooming in is not available. When you open a highlighted video clip, RealPlayer starts playing the video clip on the device display and the TV screen. See "RealPlayer ", p. 77. You can view images as a slide show on TV. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full-screen while the selected music plays. See
"Slide show", p. 37. Presentations With presentations, you can view SVG (scalable vector graphics) files, such as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their appearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view SVG files, press Presentations. Scroll to an image, and select OptionsPlay. To pause playing, select OptionsPause.
, and select Gallery 40 To zoom in, press 5. To zoom out, press 0. Print images Image print To print images with Image print, select the image you want to print, and the print option in Gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth connectivity. You can also print images using wireless LAN. If a compatible memory card is inserted, you can store the images to the memory card, and print them using a compatible printer. You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print, select the image you want to print, and the print option in Gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed after you Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black select the image. Select a printer. The printer is set as the default printer. To print to a printer compatible with PictBridge, connect the compatible data cable before you select the print option, and check that the data cable mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection. See
"USB", p. 67. The printer is automatically displayed when you select the print option. If the default printer is not available, a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change the default printer, select Options SettingsDefault printer. Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary depending on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select OptionsDefault printer. y r e l l a G To select the paper size, select Paper size, the size of paper from the list, and OK. Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Print online With Print online, you can order prints of images online directly to your home or to a store where you can pick them up. You can also order different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depend on the service provider. To use Print online, you must have at least one printing service configuration file installed. The files can be obtained from printing service providers that support Print online. For more information on the application, see the guides available at the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Share images and videos online You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the content of the albums. 41 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. sound system or TV equipped with a compatible wireless multimedia receiver. Before sharing images and videos online, you must subscribe to the service with an online image sharing service provider, and create a new account. You can usually subscribe to the service on the web page of the service provider. Contact your service provider for details on subscribing to the service. To upload a file from Gallery to the online service,
, and select GalleryImages & videos. press Scroll to the desired file, and select Options SendPost to web, or select the file and the active toolbar. from For more information on the home network, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Important security information When you configure your WLAN home network, enable an encryption method on your access point device, then on the other devices you intend to connect to your home network. Refer to the documentation of the devices. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from the devices. For more information on the application and compatible service providers, see the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. You can view or change the settings of the WLAN internet access point in your device. See "Access points", p. 107. Home network About home network Your device is compatible with Universal Plug and Play architecture (UPnP). Using a wireless LAN
(WLAN) access point device or a WLAN router, you can create a home network and connect compatible UPnP devices that support WLAN to the network, such as your device, a compatible PC, a compatible printer, and a compatible sound system or TV, or a 42 If you use the ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible device, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN security mode when you configure the internet access point. See "Connection settings", p. 107. This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party joining the ad hoc network. Your device notifies you if another device attempts to connect to it and the home network. Do not accept connection requests from an unknown device. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black If you use WLAN in a network that does not have encryption, switch off sharing your files with other devices, or do not share any private media files. See
"Settings for home network", p. 43. Settings for home network To share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices through WLAN, you must create and configure your WLAN home internet access point, then configure the settings for home network in the Home media application. See
"WLAN internet access points", p. 63. See
"Connection settings", p. 107. The options related to home network are not available in applications before the settings in the Home media application have been configured. When you access the Home media application for the first time, the setup wizard opens and helps you define the home network settings for your device. To use the setup wizard later, in the Home media main view, select OptionsRun wizard, and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a compatible PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the related software. You get the software from the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM supplied with your device, or you can download it from the device support pages on the Nokia website. y r e l l a G Configure settings To configure the settings for home network, select ToolsConnectivityHome media Settings and from the following:
Home access point Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for the home access point every time you connect to the home network, Create new to define a new access point that is used automatically when you use the home network, or None. If your home network does not have WLAN security settings enabled, you get a security warning. You can continue and switch the WLAN security on later; or cancel defining the access point and first switch on the WLAN security. See "Access points", p. 107.
Device name Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compatible devices in the home network.
Copy to Select the memory where you want to save copied media files. Set sharing on and define content Select ToolsConnectivityHome media Share content and from the following:
Content sharing Allow or deny sharing media files with compatible devices. Do not set content sharing on before you have configured all the other settings. If you set content sharing on, the 43 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G 44 other UPnP compatible devices in the home network can view and copy your files you have selected for sharing in the Images & videos folder. If you do not want the other devices to access your files, set content sharing off.
Images & video Select media files for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing status of images and videos. To update the content of the folder, select OptionsRefresh content.
Music Select playlists for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing content of playlists. To update the content of the folder, select OptionsRefresh content. View and share media files To share your media files with other UPnP compatible devices in the home network, set content sharing on. See "Set sharing on and define content", p. 43. If content sharing is off in your device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in another home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Show media files stored in your device 1. In Gallery, select an image, video clip, or sound clip, and OptionsShow via home network. 2. Select a compatible device in which the media file is shown. The images are shown both in the other home network device and your device, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. 3. To stop sharing, select OptionsStop showing. Show media files stored in the other device To show media files that are stored on another home network device in your device (or in a compatible TV, for example), do the following:
1. Press
, and select ToolsConnectivity Home mediaBrowse home. Your device starts the search of other compatible devices. Device names start to appear on the display. 2. Select a device from the list. 3. Select the type of media you want to view from the other device. The available file types depend on the features of the other device. To show your images, videos, and sound clips in another home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following:
To search files with different criteria, select OptionsFind. To sort the found files, select OptionsSort by. 4. Select the media file or folder you want to view. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black 5. Press the scroll key, and select Play or Show, and On device or Via home network. 6. Select the device in which the file is shown. To adjust the volume when playing a video or sound clip, scroll left or right. To stop sharing the media file, select Back or Stop
(available when playing videos and music). Tip: You can print images saved in Gallery through a home network with a UPnP compatible printer. See "Image print", p. 40. Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Copy media files To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Gallery and Options Move and copyCopy to home network or Move to home net.. Content sharing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files from the other device to your device, select a file in the other device and the desired copying option from the options list. Content sharing does not have to be switched on. y r e l l a G 45 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 46 Positioning (GPS) For information on position requests, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system that includes 24 satellites and their ground stations that monitor the operation of the satellites. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low-power radio signals from the satellites and measures the travel time of the signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of meters. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdoors to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular radio networks for positioning or navigation. Your device also supports Assisted GPS (A-GPS). Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection, which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. A-GPS is a network service. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider specific A-GPS settings are available. The assistance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. You must have a packet data internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
, and select Tools from the Nokia A-GPS service. To define an access point for A-GPS, press SettingsGeneralPositioning Positioning serverAccess point. A wireless LAN access point cannot be used for this service. The packet data internet access point is asked when GPS is used for the first time in your device. To enable or disable different positioning methods,
, and select Tools such as Bluetooth GPS, press SettingsGeneralPositioning Positioning methods. GPS receiver The GPS receiver is located in the top of the device. When using the receiver, from an upright position, move the device to an angle of about 45 degrees, with an unobstructed view of the sky. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in the car may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. About satellite signals If your device cannot find the satellite signal, consider the following:
If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal.
If you are outdoors, move to a more open space.
Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. See "GPS receiver"
, p. 47.
If the weather conditions are bad, the signal strength may be affected.
If the power saver turns on while the device is attempting to establish a GPS connection, the attempt is interrupted.
Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 47 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 48 Satellite status
, and select Tools To check how many satellites your device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signals, press ConnectivityGPS dataPosition OptionsSatellite status. Or, in the Maps application, select OptionsMap options Satellite info. If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal to calculate the coordinates of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Maps About Maps Press
, and select Maps. With Maps, you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and different points of interest, plan routes from one location to another, and save locations as landmarks and send them to compatible devices. Maps uses GPS. You can define the positioning methods used with your device in the device settings. See "Positioning settings", p. 105. For the most accurate location information, use either the internal GPS or a compatible external GPS receiver. When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to define an internet access point for downloading map information for your current location. To change the default access point later, select OptionsSettingsNetworkDefault access point. Almost all digital cartography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography provided for use in this device. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Downloading maps may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Tip: You can also download maps by using a wireless LAN connection or through the internet using Nokia Map Loader PC software. See "Download maps", p. 50. To receive a note when your device registers to a network outside your home cellular network, select OptionsSettingsNetworkRoaming warningOn. Contact your network service provider for details and roaming costs. Browse maps The map coverage varies by country. When you open the Maps application, Maps zooms in to the location that was saved from your last session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps application zooms in to the capital city of the country you are in based on the information the device receives from the cellular network. At the same time, the map of the location is downloaded, if it has not been downloaded during previous sessions. To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your current location, select OptionsFind place GPS position [0], or press 0 is shown on the display A GPS indicator when you browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS connection, the circles are yellow. When the device receives enough data from the satellites to calculate the coordinates of your current location, the circles turn green. To view information about satellites when you are using Maps, select OptionsMap options Satellite info. Your current location is indicated on the map with
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P
. To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right. To zoom in or out, press *
or #. To switch between the 2D and 3D views, select OptionsMap options2D/3D. To find a location, select OptionsFind place. You can choose to go to your GPS position, find an address, find a point of interest by entering a keyword, find locations nearby, or browse a guide (extra service). To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting point for a nearby search, to plan a route, 49 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P view its details, or start navigation (extra service), press the scroll key, and select the desired option. Send. If you send the landmark in a text message, the information is converted to plain text. When you browse the map on the display, for example, move to another country, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your service provider. The maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). To define what kinds of points of interest are shown on the map, select OptionsMap options Categories and the desired categories. To save a location as a landmark, in the desired location, press the scroll key, select SaveAs landmark, enter a name for the landmark, and select the categories you want to include it in. To take a screen shot of your location, select Save As image. The screen shot is saved in Gallery. To send the screen shot, in Gallery, select the screen shot, and from the active toolbar. To view saved landmarks, select OptionsFind placeLandmark. 50 To send a landmark to a compatible device, in the landmarks view, press the scroll key, and select To adjust the network, routing, and general settings, select OptionsSettings. Download maps When you browse the map on the display, for example, move to another country, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your service provider. You can view the amount of transferred data from the data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter shows the amount of network traffic when you browse maps, create routes, or search for locations online. To prevent the device from automatically downloading maps through the internet, for example, when you are outside your home cellular network, select OptionsSettingsNetwork Use networkNever. To define how much memory card space you want to use for saving maps or voice guidance files, select OptionsSettingsNetworkMax. memory card use (%). This option is available only when a Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black compatible memory card is inserted. When the memory is full, the oldest map data is deleted. The saved maps data can be deleted using Nokia Map Loader PC software. Nokia Map Loader Nokia Map Loader is PC software that you can use to download and install maps for different countries from the internet to your device or a compatible memory card (if inserted). You can also use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn navigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, you must first install it to a compatible PC. You can download the PC software from the internet at www.nokia.com/maps. Follow the instructions on the screen. You must use the Maps application before using Nokia Map Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history information to check the version of map data to be downloaded. Find a place To view points of interest near your current location or other locations on the map, select Options Find placeNearby and a category. To search for a point of interest by name, select OptionsFind placeKeyword search or start entering the first letters of the name, and select Find. To search for a location by address, select OptionsFind placeBy address. You must enter the city and country. To use an address you have saved to a contact card in Contacts, select OptionsFind placeBy addressOptions Select from contacts. To view a search result on the map, press the scroll key, and select Show on map. To return to the results list, select Back. After you have installed the PC software to your PC, to download maps, do the following:
To view a list of your previous locations, select OptionsFind placeRecent.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 1. Connect your device to the PC by using a compatible USB data cable. Select Data transfer as the USB connection mode. 2. Open Nokia Map Loader in your PC. Nokia Map Loader checks the version of map data to be downloaded. 3. Select the maps or voice guidance files you want, and download and install them to your device. Plan a route To plan a route from one location to another (for example, from your home to your office), do the following:
1. Scroll to a point on the map, press the scroll key, and select Route from. 51 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black 2. Scroll to From, and select OptionsSelect and the desired option. To adjust the routing settings, such as the mode of transportation, select OptionsSettings Routing. 3. To select the destination, scroll to To, and select OptionsSelect and the desired option. 4. To view the route itinerary, select Options Show route. The route is calculated using the selected routing settings. To view the itinerary route on the map, select OptionsShow on map. To run a simulation of the route, select Options Start simulation. Tip: You can also use a compatible GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivity with Maps. For example, in a car, an external GPS receiver can be positioned so that it has a clear view of the sky. Enable the use of an external GPS receiver in positioning settings. See "Positioning settings", p. 105. Extra services for Maps You can also purchase a turn-by-turn navigation service with voice guidance to use it in Maps. Navigation To purchase a navigation service with voice guidance to use in Maps, select OptionsExtra servicesAdd navigation. After purchasing the navigation upgrade, the service is available through Maps. After creating a route in Maps, to start navigation to the desired destination with GPS using voice guidance, select OptionsStart navigation. See
"Plan a route", p. 51. You can also start navigation by selecting any location on the map or in a results list, and Navigate to. When you use navigation for the first time, you are prompted to select the language of the voice guidance and download the voice guidance files of the selected language. You can also download voice guidance files using Nokia Map Loader. See
"Download maps", p. 50. To change the language later, in the Maps main view, select Options SettingsGeneralVoice guidance and a language, and download the voice guidance files for the selected language. To discard the created route and use another route, select OptionsAlternative route. To view only the next turns and hide the map, select OptionsMap optionsArrow mode.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 52 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To stop navigation, select OptionsStop navigation. Landmarks
, and select ToolsConnectivity Press Landmarks. With Landmarks, you can save the position information of specific locations in your device. You can sort the saved locations into different categories, such as business, and add other information to them, such as addresses. You can use your saved landmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data and Maps. GPS coordinates are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To create a new landmark, select OptionsNew landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current position. To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually. To edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address), scroll to a landmark, and select OptionsEdit. Scroll to the desired field, and enter the information. To view the landmark on the map, select Options Show on map. To create a route to the location, select OptionsNavigate using map. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To edit and create new landmark categories, scroll right in Landmarks, and select OptionsEdit categories. To add a landmark to a category, scroll to the landmark in Landmarks, and select OptionsAdd to category. Scroll to each category to which you want to add the landmark, and select it. To send one or several landmarks to a compatible device, select OptionsSend. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. GPS data GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a selected destination, position information about your current location, and traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and approximate duration of travel.
, and select ToolsConnectivityGPS Press data.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 53 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, the GPS receiver of your device must initially receive position information from at least four satellites to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Route guidance
, and select ToolsConnectivityGPS Press dataNavigation. Start the route guidance outdoors. If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites. Route guidance uses a rotating compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approximate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacles, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken into 54 account when calculating the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destination, select OptionsSet destination and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. Select Stop navigation to clear the destination set for your trip. Retrieve position information
, and select ToolsConnectivityGPS Press dataPosition. In the position view, you can view the position information of your current location. An estimate of the accuracy of the location is displayed. To save your current location as a landmark, select OptionsSave position. Landmarks are saved locations with more information, and they can be used in other compatible applications and transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter
, and select ToolsConnectivityGPS Press dataTrip distance. Select OptionsStart to activate trip distance calculation, and Stop to deactivate it. The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Select Reset to set the trip distance and time and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation. Select Restart to set the odometer and total time to zero. The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 55 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black r e s w o r b b e W Web browser To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. memory while loading such a page, the graphics on the page are not shown. For more information on the web browser, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. To browse web pages without graphics, to save memory, select OptionsSettingsPage Load contentText only. Browse the web Press
, and select Web. Important: Use only services that you trust To enter a new web page address you want to visit, select OptionsGo to web address. To retrieve the latest content of the page from the server, select OptionsNavigation options Reload. and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. To save the web address of the current page as a bookmark, select OptionsSave as bookmark. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. To browse a web page, in the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter the address in the field
), and press the scroll key. Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of 56 To use visual history to view snapshots of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (available if History list is set on in the browser settings and the current page is not the first page you visit). To go to a previously visited page, select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Options ToolsSave page. You can save pages and browse them later when offline. You can also group these saved pages into Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black folders. To access the pages you have saved, select OptionsBookmarksSaved pages. Navigate pages To open a sublist of commands or actions for the page that is open, select OptionsService options (if supported by the web page). To allow or prevent the automatic opening of multiple windows, select OptionsWindow Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups. Shortcuts while browsing
Press 1 to open your bookmarks.
Press 2 to search for keywords in the current page.
Press 3 to return to the previous page.
Press 5 to list all open windows.
Press 8 to show the page overview of the current page. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page.
Press 9 to enter a new web address.
Press 0 to go to the home page (if defined in settings).
Press * and # to zoom in or out on the page. Tip: To return to the standby mode with the browser open in the background, press twice or the end key. To return to the browser, press and hold from the list.
, and select the browser r e s w o r b b e W Mini Map and page overview help you navigate web pages that contain a large amount of information. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the web page you browse. To set Mini Map on, select OptionsSettings GeneralMini mapOn. To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired location, stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and leaves you at the selected location. When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you can also use Page overview to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press 8. To find the desired spot on the page, scroll up, down, left, or right. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are used by the weblog community and news organisations to share the latest headlines or text, for example, 57 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black r e s w o r b b e W 58 news feeds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and Atom technologies. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The default access point for widgets is the same as in the web browser. When active in the background, some widgets may update information automatically to your device. The Web application automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web feed, select Options Subscribe. To view the web feeds to which you have subscribed, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds. To update a web feed, select it and Options Refresh. To define how the web feeds are updated, select OptionsSettingsWeb feeds. Widgets The web browser supports widgets (network service). Widgets are small, downloadable web applications that deliver multimedia, news feeds, and other information, such as weather reports, to your device. Installed widgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. You can download widgets using the Download!
application or from the web. Bookmarks The bookmarks view opens when you open the Web application. You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Auto. bookmarks folder. You can also enter the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field (
). indicates the starting page defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the internet. You can also save addresses received in messages to your bookmarks and send saved bookmarks. To open the bookmarks view while browsing, press 1, or select OptionsBookmarks. To edit the details of a bookmark, such as the title, select OptionsBookmark managerEdit. In the bookmarks view, you can also open other browser folders. The Web application allows you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content of the pages you have saved offline. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Web also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Auto. bookmarks folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web feeds, you can view saved links to web feeds and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organisation web pages, personal weblogs, online communities that offer the latest headlines, and article summaries. Web feeds use RSS and Atom technologies. to end the connection and close the browser, select OptionsExit. To take the browser to the background, press the end key once. To end the connection, press and hold the end key. To delete the information the network server collects about your visits to various web pages, select OptionsClear privacy dataDelete cookies. r e s w o r b b e W Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select OptionsClear privacy dataClear cache. End the connection To end the connection and view the browser page offline, select OptionsToolsDisconnect; or Connection security If the security indicator (
connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted.
) is displayed during a The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. 59 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black r e s w o r b b e W 60 Web settings
, and select Web. Press Select OptionsSettings and from the following:
General settings
Access point Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them.
Homepage Define the home page.
Mini map Set Mini Map on or off. See "Navigate pages", p. 57.
History list While browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History list on.
Security warnings Hide or show security notifications.
Java/ECMA script Enable or disable the use of scripts. Page settings
Load content Select whether you want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select Text only, to load images or objects later during browsing, select OptionsTools Load images.
Screen size Select between full screen and the normal view with the options list.
Default encoding If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select another encoding according to language for the current page.
Block pop-ups Allow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing.
Automatic reload If you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On.
Font size Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy settings
Auto. bookmarks Enable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you want to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Auto. bookmarks folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder.
Form data saving If you do not want the data you enter to different forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time you open the page, select Off.
Cookies Enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings
Automatic updates Define whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically and how often you want to update them. Setting the application to retrieve web feeds automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges.
Acc. point for auto-update Select the desired access point for updating. This option is only available when Automatic updates is on. r e s w o r b b e W 61 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s n o i t c e n n o C Connections Your device offers several options to connect to the internet or to another compatible device or PC. For more information on connectivity, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network
(WLAN). With WLAN, you can connect your device to the internet and compatible devices that have WLAN. About WLAN To use WLAN, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Your device supports the following WLAN features:
62
IEEE 802.11b/g standard
Operation at 2.4 GHz
Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA), and 802.1x encryption methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. WLAN connections To use WLAN, you must create an internet access point (IAP) for WLAN. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the internet. See "WLAN internet access points", p. 63. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorized access to your data. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN internet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black You can use WLAN during a voice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control
(MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a WLAN and manage your WLAN connections. The WLAN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections in the active standby mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and select it. If the search finds WLANs, for example, WLAN network found is displayed, to create an internet access point (IAP) and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Start Web browsing. If you select a secured WLAN network, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN. If you are connected to a WLAN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Continue Web browsing. To end the connection in the WLAN, select the status and Disconnect WLAN. s n o i t c e n n o C If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed. To set scanning on and search for available WLANs, select the status and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, select the status and Search for WLAN. To set WLAN scanning off, select the status and select WLAN scanning off. To access the WLAN wizard application in the menu, press
, and select ToolsWLAN wiz.. WLAN internet access points Press
, and select ToolsWLAN wiz. Select Options and from the following:
Filter WLAN networks Filter out WLANs in the list of found networks. The selected networks are filtered out the next time the application searches for WLANs. 63 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s n o i t c e n n o C
Details View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active connection, the connection details are displayed.
Define access point Create an internet access point (IAP) in a WLAN.
Edit access point Edit the details of an existing IAP. To end a connection, select Options Disconnect. To close all open connections, select OptionsDisconnect all. To view the details of a connection, select OptionsDetails. The details shown depend on the connection type. You can also use connection manager to create internet access points. See "Active data connections", p. 64. Connection manager Active data connections
, and select ToolsConnectivity Press Conn. mgr.Active data connections. In the active data connections view, you can see the open data connections:
data calls packet data connections WLAN connections Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. 64 Available WLAN networks
, and select ToolsConnectivity Press Conn. mgr.Available WLAN networks. The available WLAN view shows a list of WLANs within range, their network mode (infrastructure or is shown ad hoc), and signal strength indicator. for networks with encryption, and if your device has an active connection in the network. To view the details of a network, select Options Details. To create an internet access point in a network, select OptionsDefine access point. Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth connectivity You can make a wireless connection to other compatible devices with Bluetooth connectivity. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enhancements such as headsets Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black and car kits. You can use Bluetooth connectivity to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; make a wireless connection to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer files); and connect to a compatible printer to print images with Image print. Since devices with Bluetooth wireless technology communicate using radio waves, they do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. However, they must be within 10 metres (33 feet) of each other, although the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following profiles:
Advanced Audio Distribution Profile, Audio/Video Remote Control Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, Basic Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Human Interface Device Profile, Object Push Profile, SIM Access Profile, and Synchronization Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. See "Phone and SIM", p. 103. s n o i t c e n n o C Settings Press
, and select ToolsBluetooth. When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can change the name later on. Select from the following:
Bluetooth To make a wireless connection to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On, then establish a connection. To switch off Bluetooth connectivity, select Off.
My phone's visibility To allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology, select Shown to all. To set a time after which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Define period. To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden.
My phone's name Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology.
Remote SIM mode To enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhancement, to use 65 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s n o i t c e n n o C the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, select On. Security tips Press
, and select ToolsBluetooth. When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select BluetoothOff or My phone's visibility Hidden. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This protects your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. 1. Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery. 2. Select the item and OptionsSendVia Bluetooth. 66 Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that are within range are displayed. Device icons are as follows:
computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt the search, select Stop. 3. Select the device with which you want to connect. 4. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair devices", p. 66. When the connection is established, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique address
(device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create your own passcode (1 to 16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair with a device, select OptionsNew paired device. Devices that are within range are displayed. 2. Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as well. 3. Some audio enhancements connect automatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enhancement, and select OptionsConnect to audio device. Paired devices are indicated by search. in the device To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, scroll to the device, and select from the following options:
Set as authorised Connections between your device and the authorised device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC or devices that belong to someone you trust. devices in the paired devices view. indicates authorised
Set as unauthorised Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select OptionsDelete. If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options Delete all. Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data through Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Messages received through Bluetooth connectivity are indicated by
. USB Press USB.
, and select ToolsConnectivity To have the device ask the purpose of the connection each time a compatible data cable is connected, select Ask on connectionYes. If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to change the mode during an active connection, select USB mode and from the following:
s n o i t c e n n o C 67 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s n o i t c e n n o C
PC Suite Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Nseries PC suite, Nokia Lifeblog, and Nokia Software Updater.
Data transfer Transfer data between your device and a compatible PC. Use this mode also for downloading maps with the Nokia Map Loader PC application.
Image print Print images on a compatible printer.
Media player Synchronise music with Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, transfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from the PC to synchronise with your device. 68 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (network service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video services using packet data or WLAN. You can also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your device and view them in Video Centre. Video Centre supports the same file formats as RealPlayer. All videos are played in the landscape mode by default. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. Find and view videos 1. Press
, and select Video centre. 2. To connect to a service, scroll left or right, and select the desired video service. e r t n e C o e d i V a i k o N The device updates and displays the content available in the service. 3. To view videos by categories (if available), scroll left or right to view the other tabs. 4. To view information about a video, select OptionsVideo details. 5. Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select OptionsDownload. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded clip, select OptionsPlay. 69 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e r t n e C o e d i V a i k o N 6. When the clip is playing, use the scroll key and the selection keys to control the player. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded videos are saved in Video centreMy videos. To connect to the internet to browse available services that you can add to the main view, select Add new services. Internet videos Internet videos are video clips distributed in the internet using RSS-based feeds. You can add new feeds to Internet videos in the settings. You can view your feeds in the Internet videos folder in Video Centre. To add or delete feeds, select OptionsFeed subscriptions. To view the videos available in a feed, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view information about a video, select OptionsVideo details. To download a video, scroll to it, and select OptionsDownload. 70 To play the downloaded video, press the scroll key. Play downloaded videos The downloaded videos are saved in Video centreMy videos. To play a downloaded video, press the scroll key. To play a downloaded video in the home network, select OptionsShow via home network. Home network must be configured first. See "About home network", p. 42. When the clip is playing, use the scroll key and the selection keys to control the player. If there is not enough free space in the device memory and compatible memory card, the application automatically deletes some of the oldest videos when new videos are downloaded. indicates videos that may soon be deleted. To prevent a video from being automatically deleted (
), select OptionsProtect. Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own videos to Video Centre from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. To transfer videos from a compatible PC to the memory card in your device, do the following:
Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges.
Parental control Activate the parental lock for video services.
Preferred memory Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card. If the selected memory becomes full, the device saves the content in the other memory, if available. If there is not enough space in the other memory, the application automatically deletes some of the oldest videos.
Thumbnails Select whether to view thumbnail images in video lists. 1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device (E:\) where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB data cable. 2. Select Data transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. 3. Select the videos you want to copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the videos to E:\My Videos in the memory card. The transferred videos appear in the My videos folder in Video Centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Settings In the Video Centre main view, select Options Settings and from the following:
Video service selection Select the video services you want to appear in the main view of the application. You can also view the details of a video service. Some services require a user name and a password that you receive from the service provider.
Default access points Select the access points used for the data connection. Using packet data access points to download files may involve Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e r t n e C o e d i V a i k o N 71 l r e d o f c i s u M 72 Music folder For information on radio and Nokia Podcasting, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC
+, eAAC+, MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can also use Music player to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is the method for delivering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music to your device", p. 74. Play a song or a podcast episode You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have updated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add all available items to the library, in the Music player main view, select OptionsRefresh. To play a song or a podcast episode, do the following:
1. Press
, and select MusicMusic player. 2. Select Music or Podcasts. 3. Select categories to navigate to the song or podcast episode you want to hear. 4. To play the selected files, press the scroll key. To pause playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To fast forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds after a song or podcast has started. To switch random play (
OptionsShuffle.
) on or off, select To repeat the current item (
to switch repeat off, select OptionsRepeat. If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically switched off.
), all items (
), or To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select OptionsEqualiser. To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhance bass, select OptionsAudio settings. To view a visualisation during playback, select OptionsShow visualisation. l r e d o f c i s u M To return to the standby mode and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key, or to switch to another open application, press and hold
. To close the player, select OptionsExit. Music menu
, and select MusicMusic player Press Music. The music menu shows the available music. Select the desired option in the music menu to view all songs, sorted songs, or playlists. When the Music player is playing in the background, to open the Now playing view, press and hold the multimedia key. Playlists
, and select MusicMusic player Press Music. To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists. To view details of the playlist, select Options Playlist details. Create a playlist 1. Select OptionsCreate playlist. 2. Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK. 73 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black l r e d o f c i s u M 3. To add songs now, select Yes; or to add the songs later, select No. 4. If you select Yes, select artists to find the songs you want to include in the playlist. Press the scroll key to add items. To show the song list under an artist title, scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 5. When you have made your selections, select Done. If a compatible memory card is inserted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select OptionsAdd songs. To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and OptionsAdd to a playlistSaved playlist or New playlist. To remove a song from a playlist, select Options Remove. This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select OptionsReorder list. To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key. 74 Podcasts
, and select MusicMusic player Press Podcasts. The podcast menu displays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states: never played, partially played, and completely played. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is never played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. Transfer music to your device You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. PC requirements for music transfer:
Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or later)
A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from your device's product pages on the Nokia website.
Nokia Nseries PC Suite 1.6 or later Windows Media Player 10 may cause playback delays to WMDRM technology protected files after Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black they have been transferred to your device. Check Microsoft support website for a hotfix to Windows Media Player 10 or get a newer compatible version of Windows Media Player. Transfer music from PC You can use three different methods to transfer music:
To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using the USB cable, select Data transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device.
To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB data cable and select Media player as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device.
To use Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite, connect the compatible USB data cable and select PC Suite as the connection mode. Use Data transfer and Media player modes to transfer files to a compatible memory card. To change the default USB connection mode, press
, and select ToolsConnectivityUSBUSB mode. Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been optimised to transfer music files. For information about transferring music with Nokia Music Manager, see the help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or visit the Nokia support pages. Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation functions may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and help. Manual synchronisation With manual synchronisation, you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your device in the navigation pane on the right, if more than one device is connected. 2. In the left navigation pane, browse the music files on your PC which you want to synchronise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the right. You can see the amount of available memory in your device above the Sync List. l r e d o f c i s u M 75 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To stop automatic synchronisation, click the Sync tab, and select Stop Sync to 'Nokia Handset'. Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you first need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visit www.nokia.com/music. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. To open Nokia Music Store, press MusicMusic store.
, and select To find more music in different categories of the music menu, select OptionsFind in Music store. For more information, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. l r e d o f c i s u M 76 4. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the Sync List, right-click, and select Remove from list. 5. To start the synchronisation, click Start Sync. Automatic synchronisation 1. To activate the automatic synchronisation function in Windows Media Player, click the Sync tab, select Nokia Handset > Set Up Sync..., and check the Sync this device automatically check box. 2. Select the playlists you want to synchronise automatically in the Available playlists pane, and click Add. The selected items are transferred to the Playlists to sync pane. 3. To finalise the setup for automatic synchronisation, click Finish. When the Sync this device automatically check box is checked and you connect your device to the PC, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on the playlists you select for synchronisation in Windows Media Player. If no playlists have been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchronisation. If there is not enough free memory in your device, Windows Media Player selects manual synchronisation automatically. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Media folder For information on Flash Player, Nokia Lifeblog, and Recorder, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website.
Saved clip Play a file saved in Gallery. 2. Scroll to a file, and press the scroll key to play the file. RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play video clips or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device first. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as . 3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. For more information on RealPlayer, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Play video clips
, and select ApplicationsMedia Press RealPlayer. 1. To play a saved media file, select Options Open and from the following:
Most recent clips Play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer plays a .ram file if you open an http link to it in a browser. To stream content over the air (network service), select a streaming link saved in Gallery, on a web page, or received in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. l r e d o f a i d e M 77 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black l r e d o f a i d e M 78 Activation keys To view digital rights activation keys, press select ApplicationsMediaActv. keys. Digital rights management
, and Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM software's ability to access new DRM-
protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM-protected content already in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-
DRM-protected content. Digital rights management (DRM) protected content comes with an associated activation key that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activation keys and the content, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the activation keys which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the activation keys in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM protected content, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and the content in case the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activation keys or the content may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. In the main view, select from the following:
Valid keys View keys that are connected to media files or whose validity period has not begun.
Invalid keys View keys that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a protected media file in the device but no connected activation key.
Not in use View keys that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time for a media file, select an invalid activation key and OptionsGet new key (web service messages must be enabled). Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c i v e d r u o y e s i l a n o s r e P Personalise your device You can personalise your device by changing the standby mode, main menu, tones, themes, or font size. Most of the personalisation options, such as changing the font size, can be accessed through the device settings. See "Personalisation settings", p. 101. For information on 3-D tones, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Themes
, and select ToolsSettings Press GeneralPersonalisationThemes. You can change the look of the display, such as the wallpaper and icons. To change the theme that is used for all the applications in your device, select General. To preview a theme before activating it, select OptionsPreview. To activate the theme, select OptionsSet. The active theme is indicated by
. To change the layout of the main menu, select Menu view. Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. To edit the wallpaper and power saver of the current theme that appear in the standby mode, select Wallpaper to change the background image or Power saver to change the power saver. Profilesset tones Press
, and select ToolsProfiles. You can set and customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. To change the profile, select a profile, and OptionsActivate. To also change the profile, press the power key in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK. Tip: To switch between the general and silent profiles in the standby mode, press and hold
#. 79 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c i v e d r u o y e s i l a n o s r e P 80 To modify a profile, scroll to the profile, and select OptionsPersonalise. shortcuts may be fixed, and you cannot change them. If you want the callers name to be spoken when your device rings, select OptionsPersonalise, and set Say caller's name to On. The callers name must be saved in Contacts. To create a new profile, select OptionsCreate new.
, and select ApplicationsClock To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press OptionsSettingsClock type. You can also change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver. See
"Themes", p. 79. Modify the standby mode Modify the main menu
, and To switch the active standby on or off, press select ToolsSettingsGeneral PersonalisationStandby modeActive standby. The active standby display shows application shortcuts, and events from applications such as calendar and player. To change the selection key shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the active standby mode, select ToolsSettings General Personalisation Standby mode. Some To change the main menu view, in the main menu, select OptionsChange Menu viewGrid or List. To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select OptionsMove, Move to folder, or New folder. You can move less used applications into folders and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. To use animated icons in your device, in the main menu, select OptionsIcon animationOn. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Messaging Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. For more information on messaging, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Messaging main view Press
, and select Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message. Messaging contains the following folders:
Inbox Received messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. My folders Organise your messages into folders. Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the Templates folder in My folders. You can also create and save your own templates. Mailbox Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view
your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. Drafts Draft messages that have not been sent are stored here. Sent The last messages that have been sent, excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity, are stored here. You can change the number of messages to save in this folder. Outbox Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Reports You can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent
(network service). Write and send messages Press
, and select Messaging. Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See "Define the e-mail settings", p. 84. g n i g a s s e M 81 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black g n i g a s s e M The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 1. Select New messageText message to send a text message, Multimedia message to send a multimedia message (MMS), Audio message to send an audio message (a multimedia message that includes one sound clip), or E-mail to send an e-mail. 2. In the To field, press the scroll key to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipients phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon (;) that separates the recipients, press *. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3. In the Subject field, enter the subject of the multimedia message or e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select OptionsAddress fields. 82 4. In the message field, write the message. To insert a template, select OptionsInsert or Insert objectTemplate. 5. To add a media object to a multimedia message, select OptionsInsert objectImage, Sound clip, or Video clip. 6. To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Insert new Image, Sound clip, or Video clip. To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide. To see what the multimedia message looks like, select OptionsPreview. 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select OptionsInsertImage, Sound clip, Video clip, Note, or Other for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by
. 8. To send the message, select OptionsSend, or press the call key. Note: Your device may indicate that your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your device. Your device may not indicate whether the message is received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, contact your service provider. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Longer messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video clips that are saved in the .mp4 format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options Retrieve. Messaging inbox Receive messages Press
, and select MessagingInbox. indicates an unread text In the Inbox folder, message, unread audio message, and through Bluetooth connectivity. an unread multimedia message, data received and 1 new When you receive a message, message are shown in the standby mode. To open the message, select Show. To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To reply to a received message, select OptionsReply. When you open a multimedia message (
may see an image and a message. sound is included, or the sound or the video, select the indicator. is shown if if video is included. To play
), you an To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options Objects. If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presentation, select the indicator. g n i g a s s e M 83 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black g n i g a s s e M 84 Mailbox Define the e-mail settings Tip: Use Settings wizard to define your mailbox settings. Press UtilitiesSett. wizard.
, and select Tools To use e-mail, you must have a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly. See "Access points", p. 107. See
"E-mail settings", p. 87. You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Mailbox in the Messaging main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start. When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox Press
, and select Messaging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox (Connect to mailbox?). To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes. When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No. To create a new e-mail message, select New messageE-mail in the Messaging main view or OptionsCreate messageE-mail in your mailbox. See "Write and send messages", p. 81. Retrieve e-mail messages
, and select Messaging and a mailbox. Press If you are offline, select OptionsConnect to start a connection to the remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select OptionsRetrieve e-mail New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only the messages that have been marked, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black g n i g a s s e M 2. To close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options Disconnect. 3. To open an e-mail message, press the scroll key. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; select Options Retrieve. If the mailbox, select OptionsDelete. In Delete message from:, select Phone only. The device mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select OptionsDeletePhone and server. To retrieve e-mail messages automatically, select OptionsE-mail settingsAutomatic retrieval. See "Automatic retrieval settings", p. 89. To cancel deleting an e-mail from the device and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection select OptionsRestore.
, and Setting the device to retrieve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options Disconnect. Delete e-mail messages Press
, and select Messaging and a mailbox. To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a message. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk. 85 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black g n i g a s s e M 86 Some or all message centres or access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message settings
, and select MessagingOptions Press SettingsText message. Select from the following:
Message centres View a list of all text message centres that have been defined.
Preferred connection Select the connection to use.
Reply via same centre Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (network service). Multimedia message settings
, and select MessagingOptions Press SettingsMultimedia message. Select from the following:
Message centre in use Select which message
Image size Define the size of the image in a centre to use to deliver text messages.
Character encoding To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support.
Receive report Select whether the network sends delivery reports on your messages
(network service).
Message validity Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre.
Message sent as Contact your service provider to learn if your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. multimedia message.
MMS creation mode If you select Guided, the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted, the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. To include content in your messages without notifications, select Free.
Access point in use Select which access point is used as the preferred connection.
Multimedia retrieval Select how you want to receive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellular network, select Auto in home netw.. Outside your home cellular network, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message centre. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Outside your home cellular network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retrievalAlways automatic, your device automatically makes an active packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home cellular network.
Allow anon. msgs. Select whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender.
Receive adverts Define whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements.
Receive report Select whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log
(network service).
Deny report sending Select whether you want to deny your device sending delivery reports of received messages.
Message validity Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. E-mail settings Manage mailboxes Press SettingsE-mail.
, and select MessagingOptions g n i g a s s e M To select which mailbox you want to use to send e-
mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes, scroll to the desired mailbox, and press C. To create a new mailbox, in Mailboxes, select OptionsNew mailbox. The name you give to the new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the connection settings, user settings, retrieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Connection settings Press SettingsE-mailMailboxes, a mailbox, and Connection settings.
, and select MessagingOptions To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail, and from the following:
User name Enter your user name given to you by your service provider.
Password Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox.
Incoming mail server Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. 87 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
Access point in use Select an internet access point (IAP). See "Access points", p. 107.
Mailbox name Enter a name for the mailbox.
Mailbox type Defines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4. This setting cannot be changed.
Security (ports) Select the security option used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox.
Port Define a port for the connection.
APOP secure login (for POP3 only) Use with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the following:
My e-mail address Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider.
Outgoing mail server Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-
mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. The settings for User name, Password, Access point in use, Security (ports), and Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e-mail. g n i g a s s e M 88 User settings Press SettingsE-mailMailboxes, a mailbox, and User settings.
, and select MessagingOptions Select from the following:
My name Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipients device when the recipients device supports this function.
Send message Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message. If you select During next conn., e-
mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available.
Send copy to self Select whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox.
Include signature Select whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages.
New e-mail alerts Select whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings Press SettingsE-mailMailboxes, a mailbox, and Retrieval settings.
, and select MessagingOptions Select from the following:
Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
E-mail to retrieve Define which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only, Size limit
(POP3), or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Other settings
, and select MessagingOptions Press SettingsOther. Select from the following:
Save sent messages Select whether you want to save a copy of the text messages, multimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Sent folder.
Number of saved msgs. Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted.
Memory in use Select the memory where you want to save your messages.
Retrieval amount Define how many new e-
mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox.
IMAP4 folder path (for IMAP4 only) Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed.
Folder subscriptions (for IMAP4 only) Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox, and retrieve content from those folders. Automatic retrieval settings Press SettingsE-mailMailboxes, a mailbox, and Automatic retrieval.
, and select MessagingOptions Select from the following:
E-mail notifications To automatically retrieve the headings to your device when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or Only in home netw..
E-mail retrieval To automatically retrieve the headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw.. Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrieve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of g n i g a s s e M 89 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s l l a c e k a M Make calls For information on conference calls, speed dialling, voice dialling, call waiting, and options during calls, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Video sharing is also explained in the extended user guide. Voice calls 1. In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C. For international calls, press * twice for the +
character (replaces the international access code), and enter the country code, area code
(omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. contacts are listed. To call, press the call key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or video mailbox (network services, video mailbox available only in the UMTS network), press and hold 1 in the standby mode, and select Voice mailbox or Video mailbox. To change the phone number of your voice or video
, and select ToolsUtilities mailbox, press Call mailbox, a mailbox, and OptionsChange number. Enter the number (obtained from your network service provider), and select OK. 2. Press the call key to call the number. 3. Press the end key to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another application is active. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, select Silence. 90
, and select To make a call from Contacts, press Contacts. Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. Matching If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Call divertVoice calls Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black If busy function in phone settings to forward calls, declining an incoming call also forwards the call. When you select Silence to mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call, informing the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select OptionsSend text message. To set up this option and write a standard text message, select ToolsSettings PhoneCallReject call with SMS. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, select Tools SettingsPhoneCallImage in video call. Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video call, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2. Select OptionsCallVideo call. The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending (
sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic.
), in which case you only hear the 3. To end the video call, press the end key. s l l a c e k a M 91 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. To answer the video call, press the call key. Allow video image to be sent to caller? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes. If you do not activate the video call, video sending is not activated, and you only hear the sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Tools SettingsPhoneCallImage in video call. To end the video call, press the end key. Internet calls With the internet call service (network service), you can make and receive calls over the internet. Internet calls can be established between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To make or receive an internet call, your device must be connected to an internet call service. s l l a c e k a M 92 To connect to an internet call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection network, such as a WLAN access point. Your device supports voice calls over the internet
(net calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts an emergency call through your net call provider. Due to the established nature of cellular telephony, you should use cellular networks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular network coverage available, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attempt an emergency call. The capability for an emergency call using internet telephony depends on the availability of a WLAN network and your net call provider's implementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your net call provider to check the internet telephony emergency call capability. Create an internet call profile Before you can make internet calls, you must create an internet call profile. 1. Press
, select ToolsSettings ConnectionSIP settingsOptionsNew SIP profile, and enter the required information. Ensure that Registration is set to Always on. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Contact your internet call provider for the correct settings. 2. Select Proxy serverTransport type Auto. 3. Select Back until you return to the main view of connection settings. 4. Select Internet tel.OptionsNew profile. Enter a name for the profile, and select the SIP profile you just created. To use the created profile for connecting to the
, and internet call service automatically, press select ToolsConnectivityInternet tel. Preferred profile. To log in to the internet call service manually, select RegistrationWhen needed, and Transport typeUDP or TCP in the SIP settings when creating an internet call profile. Connect to the internet call service To make or receive an internet call, your device must be connected to an internet call service. If you have selected automatic login, your device automatically connects to the internet call service. If you log in to the service manually, select an available network from the list and Select. s l l a c e k a M When you are connected to an internet call service, is shown in the standby mode. The list of networks is refreshed automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh the list manually, select OptionsRefresh. Use this option if your WLAN access point is not shown. To select an internet call service for outgoing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select OptionsChange service. To configure new services, select Options Configure service. This option is shown only if there are services that have not been configured. To save the network to which you are currently connected, select OptionsSave network. The saved networks are marked with a star in the list of networks. To connect to an internet call service using a hidden WLAN, select OptionsUse hidden network. To end the connection to an internet call service, select OptionsDisconnect from serv.. Make internet calls When you have activated the internet call feature, you can make an internet call from all applications where you can make a regular voice call. For example, in Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and select CallOptionsInternet call. 93 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s l l a c e k a M 94 To make an internet call in the standby mode, enter the phone number or internet address, and press the call key. To make an internet call to an address that does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch the device from the number mode to the letter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key.
, To make an internet call from Contacts, press select Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and select OptionsInternet call. To make an internet call from the log, press select ToolsLog and the log type, scroll to the desired contact, and select OptionsInternet call.
, Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. For more information on Log, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Recent calls Press
, and select ToolsLog. To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialled voice calls, select Recent calls. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. To clear all recent call lists, select OptionsClear recent calls in the recent calls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase, and select OptionsClear list. To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press C. Call duration Press
, and select ToolsLog. To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, select Call duration. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options Clear timers. For this you need the lock code. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
) k o o b e n o h p
s t c a t n o C Contacts (phonebook) In Contacts, you can save and update contact information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. For more information on Contacts and SIM contacts, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Save and edit names and numbers 1. Press
, and select ContactsOptions New contact. 2. Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done. To edit contact cards, scroll to the contact card you want to edit, and select OptionsEdit. You can also search for the desired contact by entering the first letters of the name to the search field. A list of the contacts starting with the letters appear on the display. Tip: To add and edit contact cards, you can also use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia Nseries PC Suite. To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open the contact card, and select OptionsEdit OptionsAdd thumbnail. The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Add ringing tones for contacts Press
, and select Contacts. To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, do the following:
1. Press the scroll key to open a contact card or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2. Select OptionsRinging tone. A list of ringing tones opens. 3. Select the ringing tone you want to use for the individual contact or the members of the selected group. When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callers 95 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black telephone number is sent with the call and your device recognises it). To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Copy contacts To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your
, and select ContactsOptions device, press SIM contactsSIM directory, the names you want to copy, and OptionsCopy to Contacts. To copy contacts to your SIM card, in Contacts, select the names you want to copy and OptionsCopy to SIM directory, or OptionsCopyTo SIM directory. Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied.
) k o o b e n o h p
s t c a t n o C 96 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Applications folder Calculator Press
, and select ApplicationsCalculator. Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, enter the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the calculation, and select =. Application manager With Application manager, you can see the software packages installed in your device. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. Press
, and select ApplicationsApp. mgr.. You can install two types of applications and software to your device:
J2ME applications based on Java technology with the extension .jad or .jar
Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with the extension .sis or .sisx Only install software specifically designed for your device: Nokia N82. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product:
Nokia N82-1. For application manager settings, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Install applications and software Installation files may be transferred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachment or using other connectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Nseries PC Suite to install an application to your device. If you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, save the file to a compatible memory card (local disk). indicates a .sis or .sisx application, a Java that the application is not fully application, l r e d o f s n o i t a c i l p p A 97 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black l r e d o f s n o i t a c i l p p A installed, and the memory card. that the application is installed on Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. Before installation, note the following:
To view the application type, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select OptionsView details. To display the security certificate details of the application, in Details:, scroll to Certificates, and select View details. See "Certificate management", p. 104.
If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup copy. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar 98 file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an application or software, do the following:
1. To locate an installation file, press
, and select ApplicationsApp. mgr.. Alternatively, search the device memory or a compatible memory card (if inserted) in File manager, or open a message in MessagingInbox that contains an installation file. 2. In Application manager, select Options Install. In other applications, scroll to the installation file, and select it to start the installation. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you install an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed application, locate it in the menu, and select it. If the application does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applications folder in the main menu. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To see which software packages are installed or removed and when, select OptionsView log. remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. See "File manager", p. 100. Remove applications and software
, and select ApplicationsApp. mgr.. Press Scroll to a software package, and select Options Remove. Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the removed software package. If you l r e d o f s n o i t a c i l p p A 99 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Tools folder For information on Voice commands, Device manager, and synchronisation, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. File manager To browse files and folders in the memory, press
, and select ToolsFile mgr.. When you open File manager, the device memory view (
) opens. Scroll right to open the memory card view (
), if available. To see how much memory different data types use, select OptionsMemory details. To find a file, select OptionsFind and the memory from which to search. Enter a search text that matches the file name. To mark files, select OptionsMark/Unmark Mark or Mark all. To move or copy the files, select OptionsMove to folder or Copy to folder. l r e d o f s l o o T 100 Memory card tool A compatible memory card may already be inserted in your device.
, and select ToolsUtilities Press Memory. To see how much memory different data types use, select OptionsMemory details. To back up information from the device memory to a compatible memory card, select OptionsBack up phone memory. The device notifies you if there is not enough free space to create a backup. To restore information from the compatible memory card to the device memory, select OptionsRestore from card. When a memory card is reformatted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplied preformatted and others require formatting; consult your retailer. The memory card supplied with your device does not need to be formatted. To format a memory card, select Options Format memory card and Yes to confirm. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Settings Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. For information on application settings, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. General settings In general settings, you can edit the general settings of your device or restore the device to original default settings. You can adjust time and date settings also in the clock. Personalisation settings
, and select ToolsSettings Press GeneralPersonalisation. You can edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functions of your device. Themes allows you to change the look of the display. See "Themes", p. 79. Voice comms. opens the settings for the Voice commands application. Tones allows you to change the tones of the calendar, clock, and currently active profile. Display
Light sensor Scroll left or right to adjust the light sensor that observes the lighting conditions and adjusts the brightness of the display. The light sensor may cause the display to flicker in low light.
Font size Adjust the size of the text and icons on the display.
Power saver time-out Select the time-out period after which the power saver is activated.
Welcome note / logo The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device.
Light time-out Select a time-out after which the backlight of the display is switched off.
Rotate screen Change the setting for automatic display rotation. In most applications, the display rotates automatically between portrait and landscape modes based on the orientation of the device. To ensure that the automatic display rotation works, hold the s g n i t t e S 101 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s g n i t t e S device in an upright position. Automatic rotation is not functioning, if you change the display rotation setting manually in an application. When you exit the application, automatic rotation is activated again. Standby mode
Active standby Activate shortcuts to applications in the standby mode.
Shortcuts Assign a shortcut to the selection keys in the standby mode. If the active standby is set off, you can also assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key.
Active standby apps. If the active standby is set on, select the application shortcuts you want to appear in the active standby.
Operator logo This setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Language Changing the settings for the phone language or writing language affects every application in your device, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again.
Phone language Change the language of the display text in your device. This also affects the format used for date and time and the separators 102 used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the device restarts.
Writing language Change the writing language. This affects the characters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used.
Predictive text Set predictive text input on or off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Enhancement settings
, and select ToolsSettings Press GeneralEnhancement. Some enhancement connectors indicate which type of enhancement is connected to the device. See
"Display indicators", p. 17. The available settings depend on the type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from the following:
Default profile Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a certain compatible enhancement to your device.
Automatic answer Select whether you want the device to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black is set to Beep once or Silent, automatic answer is disabled.
Lights Set whether lights remain on or are switched off after the time-out. This setting is not available for all enhancements. TV-out settings To change the settings for a TV-out connection, select TV-Out and from the following:
Default profile Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to your device.
TV screen size Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TVs.
TV system Select the analogue video signal system that is compatible with your TV.
Flicker filter To improve image quality on the screen of your TV, select On. The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Security settings For security module settings, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Phone and SIM Press GeneralSecurityPhone and SIM card.
, and select ToolsSettings s g n i t t e S
PIN code request When active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards.
PIN code, PIN2 code, and Lock code You can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9. If you forget the PIN or the PIN2 code, contact your service provider. If you forget the lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider.See "Access codes", p. 13. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number.
Keypad autolock period Select whether the keypad is locked when your device has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip: To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press the left selection key, then *.
Phone autolock period To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a time-out after which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the autolock period, select None. Tip: To lock the device manually, press the power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone. 103 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s g n i t t e S 104
Lock if SIM card changed You can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the owners cards.
Closed user group You can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network service).
Confirm SIM services You can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service).
, and select ToolsSettings Certificate management Press GeneralSecurityCertificate management. Digital certificates do not guarantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certificates that are stored in your device. Scroll right to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or
"Certificate not valid yet" is shown even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. For more information, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Restore original settings
, and select ToolsSettings Press GeneralFactory settings. You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Positioning settings Call settings
, and select ToolsSettings Press GeneralPositioning. Positioning methods
Integrated GPS Use the integrated GPS receiver of your device.
Assisted GPS Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS).
Bluetooth GPS Use a compatible external GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivity.
Network based Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point, and positioning server for A-GPS, select Positioning server. The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings. Phone settings In phone settings, you can edit settings related to phone calls and network. For information on call barring, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website.
, and select ToolsSettingsPhone Press Call.
Send my caller ID You can set your phone number to be displayed to (Yes) or hidden from
(No) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your service provider when you make a subscription (Set by network)
(network service).
Call waiting If you have activated call waiting
(network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Set the function on (Activate) or off
(Cancel), or check whether the function is activated (Check status).
Internet call waiting Select Activated to be notified of a new incoming internet call while you have a call in progress.
Internet call alert Select On to be alerted for incoming internet calls. If you select Off, you are not alerted, but a notification about missed calls appears.
Default call type To set internet calls as the default call type when making calls, select Internet call. If an internet call service is not available, a regular voice call is started instead.
Reject call with SMS To send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call, select Yes. s g n i t t e S 105 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s g n i t t e S 106
Message text Write a text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Tip: To switch between the phone lines, press and hold # in the standby mode.
Image in video call If video is not sent during
Line change To prevent line selection a video call, you can select a still image to be displayed instead.
Automatic redial Select On, and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialling, press the end key.
Show call duration Activate this setting if you want the length of a call to be displayed during the call.
Speed dial Select On, and the numbers assigned to the number keys (2 to 9) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key.
Anykey answer Select On, and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, except the left and right selection keys, the power key, and the end key.
Line in use This setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not is able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, shown in the standby mode.
(network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert
, and select ToolsSettingsPhone Press Call divert. Call divert allows you to divert your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select which calls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. Set the option on (Activate) or off
(Cancel), or check whether the option is activated
(Check status). Several diverting options can be active at the same is shown in time. When all calls are diverted, the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Network settings
, and select ToolsSettingsPhone Press Network. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Your device can automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS
Network mode Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode, the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements between the wireless service providers. Contact your network service provider for details and roaming costs. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider.
Operator selection Select Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers.
Cell info display Select On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network s g n i t t e S based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Connection settings In connection settings, you can edit access points and other connectivity settings. You can also edit settings for Bluetooth connectivity in the Bluetooth connectivity application. See
"Settings", p. 65. You can also edit settings for data cable connections in the USB application. See "USB", p. 67. For more information on connection settings, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Access points
, and select ToolsSettings Create a new access point Press ConnectionAccess points. You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. indicates a protected access point. indicates a packet data access point. 107 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s g n i t t e S 108 indicates a WLAN access point. Tip: You can create internet access points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new access point, select Options New access point. To edit the settings of an access point, select OptionsEdit. Follow the instructions from your service provider.
Connection name Enter a descriptive name for the connection.
Data bearer Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Packet data access points Press ConnectionAccess pointsOptionsEdit or New access point.
, and select ToolsSettings Follow the instructions from your service provider.
Access point name You obtain the access point name from your service provider.
User name The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider.
Prompt password If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes.
Password A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by the service provider.
Authentication Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible.
Homepage Depending on the access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the address of the multimedia messaging centre. Select OptionsAdvanced settings to change the following settings:
Network type Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other settings depend on the selected network type.
Phone IP address (for IPV4 only) Enter the IP address of your device.
DNS address Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black by your service provider. Contact your internet service provider to obtain these addresses.
Proxy server address Enter the address of encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. the proxy server.
Proxy port number Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Press ConnectionAccess pointsOptionsEdit or New access point.
, and select ToolsSettings Follow the instructions from the WLAN service provider.
WLAN network name Select Enter manually or Search for networks. If you select an existing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device.
Network status Define whether the network name is displayed.
WLAN network mode Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the same WLAN network name.
WLAN security mode Select the encryption used: WEP, 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2. If you select Open network, no To enter the settings for the selected security mode, select WLAN security settings. For more information, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Packet data settings
, and select ToolsSettings Press ConnectionPacket data. The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection.
Packet data connection If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e-
mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed, the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it.
Access point The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. s g n i t t e S 109 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
High speed packet access Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network service) in UMTS networks. Wireless LAN settings
, and select ToolsSettings Press ConnectionWireless LAN.
Show WLAN availability Select whether is displayed in the standby mode when a wireless LAN is available.
Scan for networks If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes, select how often the device searches for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, select Options Advanced settings. Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommended. Internet call settings
, and select ToolsSettings Press ConnectionInternet tel.. To create a new internet call profile, select OptionsNew profile. To edit an existing profile, select OptionsEdit. s g n i t t e S 110 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-
circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-
circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15C and 25C (59F and 77F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. n o i t a m r o f n i y r e t t a B 111 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i y r e t t a B 112 Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with water, or seek medical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorised Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. What if your battery is not authentic?
If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery. n o i t a m r o f n i y r e t t a B 113 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c n a n e t n i a m d n a e r a C 114 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage.
Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics.
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or
Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and strong detergents to clean the device. all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it.
Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged.
Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics.
Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards.
Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide.
Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation.
Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses.
Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices.
Use chargers indoors.
Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes.
To reset the device from time to time for optimum performance, power off the device and remove the battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. Disposal The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the European Union all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to separate collection at the end of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Return the products to collection to prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Collection information is available from the product retailer, local waste authorities, national producer responsibility organizations, or your local Nokia representative. For more information, see product Eco-Declaration or country-specific information at www.nokia.com. e c n a n e t n i a m d n a e r a C 115 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i y t e f a s l a n o i t i d d A 116 Additional safety information Small children device, because information stored on them may be erased. Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Medical devices Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 centimeters (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) should be maintained between a wireless device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should:
Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added.
Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket.
Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device to minimize the potential for interference.
Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place.
Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-
vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. n o i t a m r o f n i y t e f a s l a n o i t i d d A 117 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i y t e f a s l a n o i t i d d A 118 Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safely used in their vicinity. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-
programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call:
1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to activate the phone function before you can make Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information
(SAR) This mobile device meets guidelines for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is 1.35 W/
kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. Your mobile device is also designed to meet the requirements for exposure to radio waves established by the Federal Communications Commission (USA) and Industry Canada. These requirements set a SAR limit of 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of tissue. The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for use at the ear is 1.30 W/kg and when properly worn on the body is 1.27 W/kg. Information about this device model can be found at www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid by searching the equipment authorization system using FCC ID:
QVVRM-313. n o i t a m r o f n i y t e f a s l a n o i t i d d A 119 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Index x e d n I A access codes 13 access points 63, 107 accessories See enhancements activation keys 78 active standby mode 80, 102 active toolbar in camera 24 in gallery 36 address book See contacts albums, media 37 answering calls 90 application manager 97 applications 97 attachments 83, 85 audio messages 81 B backlight time-out 101 battery power saver setting 101 saving power 14 120 blogs 57 Bluetooth connectivity device address 66 device visibility 65 pairing devices 66 receiving data 67 security 66 sending data 66 settings 65 switching on/off 65 bookmarks 58 brightness, display 101 browser bookmarks 58 browsing pages 56, 57 cache memory 59 security 59 settings 60 widgets 58 C cable connection 67 cache memory 59 calculator 97 calls 90 answering 90 duration of 94 internet calls 93 rejecting 90 settings 105 camera colour 32 flash 27 geotagging 26 image quality 31 imaging mode 25 lighting 32 location information 26 scenes 27 self-timer 28 sequence mode 27 settings 31 video mode 30 video quality 33 certificates 104 clock 80 computer connections 68 See also data connections connection manager 64 contacts copying 96 editing 95 images in 95 ringing tones 95 saving 95 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black copyright protection 78 D data connections cable 67 PC connectivity 68 declining calls 90 dialled numbers 94 dismissing calls 90 display settings 101 DRM (digital rights management) 78 duration of calls 94 E e-mail messages 84 enhancements settings 102 F factory settings, restoring 104 feeds, news 57 font settings 101 formatting memory cards 100 G gallery 35 general information 12 GPS (Global Positioning System) 46 grid view of menus 80 H headset 21 help application 12 home network 42 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 18 I IAPs (internet access points) 63 images editing 38 printing 40, 41 sharing online 41 inbox, message 83 indicators and icons 17 installation of applications 97 internet calls 92 connecting 93 making 93 profiles 92, 110 settings 110 internet connection 56 See also browser J J2ME Java application support 97 Java scripts/applications 97 x e d n I K keyguard 103 keypad 103 L landmarks 53 language settings 102 light settings 101 list view of menus 80 location information 26, 46 lock code 13 locking keypad 103 loudspeaker 21 M mailbox e-mail 84 video 90 voice 90 main menu 80 Maps 48 media music player 72 RealPlayer 77 121 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black x e d n I streaming 77 memory clearing 15 web cache 59 messages e-mail 84 folders for 81 icon for incoming 83 multimedia 83 settings 85 voice 90 Mini Map 57 MMS (multimedia message service) 81, 83 multimedia menu 19 multimedia messages 81, 83 music player 72 muting sound 90 my numbers 95 N navigation tools 46 network settings 106 news feeds 57 O offline mode 21 operator logo 102 outbox, message 81 122 P packet data connection access point settings 108 settings 109 page overview 57 personal certificates 104 personalisation 79, 101 phonebook See contacts photographs See camera PictBridge 40 PIN code 13 PIN2 code 13 positioning information 46 positioning settings 105 power saver 101 presentations, multimedia 40, 83 printing images 40 profiles internet call profile 92, 110 offline restrictions 21 proxy settings 109 PUK codes 13 R RealPlayer 77 recording video clips 30 redial feature 106 rejecting calls 90 remote mailbox 84 ringing tones 79 roaming 106 S scenes, image and video 27 screen settings 101 security certificates 104 web browser 59 security code 13 self-timer, camera 28 sent messages folder 81 setting wizard 16 settings access points 107 Bluetooth connectivity 65 call divert 106 calls 105 camera 31 certificates 104 display 101 enhancements 102 home network 43 internet call 110 language 102 network 106 packet data 109 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black packet data access points 108 personalisation 101 positioning 105 shortcuts 102 standby 102 tv-out 103 Video Centre 71 web browser 60 WLAN 110 WLAN internet access points 109 shooting modes, camera 27 shortcuts 102 SIM card security 103 slide show 37 SMS (short message service) 81 software applications 97 software update 12 songs 72 speaker phone 21 standby mode 80, 102 streaming media 77 Symbian applications 97 T templates, message 82 text messages receiving and reading 83 replying to 83 sending 81 settings 86 themes 79 time-out for backlight 101 tones ring settings 79 settings 101 toolbar 24, 36 transferring data 16 transferring music 74 TV configuration 103 tv-out mode 39 U unlocking keypad 103 UPIN code 13 UPnP (Universal Plug and Play architecture) 42 UPUK code 13 USB cable connection 67 V video calls 91, 92 voice calls See calls voice over IP (VOIP) 92 volume controls 21 x e d n I W wallpaper 79 web connection 56 web logs 57 welcome 16 welcome note 101 widgets 58 wireless LAN (WLAN) 62 wireless LAN settings 110 Z zooming 25, 31 123 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta Magenta Yellow Magenta Yellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
1 2 3 4 5 6 | User Guide | Users Manual | 1.85 MiB | / November 01 2008 |
Nokia N82 User Guide 9205734 Issue 1 Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow Yellow Black Black DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORATION declares that this RM-313 product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declaration of Conformity can be found at www.nokia.com/phones/declaration_of_conformity/. 2007 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, Nseries, N82, Navi, N-Gage, and Visual Radio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners Reproduction, transfer, distribution, or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. This product includes software licensed from Symbian Software Ltd 1998-2007. Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending patents. T9 text input software Copyright 1997-2007. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps software are copyright 1996-2002 The FreeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncommercial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional information, including that related to promotional, internal, and commercial uses, may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com. Nokia operates a policy of ongoing development. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NOKIA OR ANY OF ITS LICENSORS BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUSED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The third-party applications provided with your device may have been created and may be owned by persons or entities not affiliated with or related to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectual property rights to the third-party applications. As such, Nokia does not take any responsibility for end-user support, functionality of the applications, or the information in the applications or these materials. Nokia does not provide any warranty for the third-party applications. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS ARE PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT NEITHER NOKIA NOR ITS AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF TITLE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR THAT THE APPLICATIONS WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of particular products and applications and services for these products may vary by region. Please check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availability of language options. Export controls This device may contain commodities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contact your local service facility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. 9205734/Issue 1 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s t n e t n o C Contents For your safety ............................................7 About your device...........................................................8 Network services.............................................................9 Enhancements, batteries, and chargers.......................9 Get connected............................................11 Useful information.....................................12 Help.................................................................................12 Get started.....................................................................12 Extended user guide.....................................................12 Additional applications................................................12 Software updates..........................................................12 Settings..........................................................................13 Access codes..................................................................13 Prolong battery life.......................................................14 Free memory.................................................................15 Your device.................................................16 Welcome........................................................................16 Transfer content............................................................16 Display indicators..........................................................17 Fast downloading.........................................................18 Shortcuts........................................................................19 Multimedia menu..........................................................19 Mobile Search................................................................20 Games.............................................................................20 Headset..........................................................................21 Volume and loudspeaker control................................21 Offline profile.................................................................21 Camera.......................................................23 About the camera.........................................................23 Image capture...............................................................23 Video recording.............................................................29 Camera settings.............................................................31 Gallery........................................................34 View and organise files................................................34 Images and video clips.................................................35 Edit images....................................................................37 Edit videos.....................................................................38 TV-out mode..................................................................38 Presentations................................................................39 Print images..................................................................39 Share images and videos online..................................40 Home network...............................................................41 Positioning (GPS)........................................45 About GPS.......................................................................45 GPS receiver...................................................................46 About satellite signals..................................................46 Maps...............................................................................47 Landmarks.....................................................................52 GPS data.........................................................................53 Web browser..............................................55 Browse the web............................................................55 Navigate pages..............................................................56 Web feeds and blogs....................................................56 Bookmarks.....................................................................57 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s t n e t n o C Empty the cache............................................................57 End the connection.......................................................58 Connection security......................................................58 Web settings..................................................................58 Connections................................................60 Wireless LAN..................................................................60 Connection manager....................................................62 Bluetooth connectivity.................................................62 USB..................................................................................65 PC connections..............................................................66 Nokia Video Centre.....................................67 Find and view videos....................................................67 Internet videos..............................................................68 Play downloaded videos..............................................68 Transfer videos from your PC.......................................68 Settings..........................................................................69 Music folder................................................70 Music player...................................................................70 Nokia Music Store..........................................................74 Media folder...............................................75 RealPlayer .....................................................................75 Activation keys..............................................................76 Personalise your device.............................77 Themes...........................................................................77 Profilesset tones........................................................77 Modify the standby mode............................................78 Modify the main menu.................................................78 Messaging..................................................79 Messaging main view...................................................79 Write and send messages............................................79 Messaging inbox...........................................................81 Mailbox...........................................................................82 Messaging settings.......................................................83 Make calls...................................................88 Voice calls.......................................................................88 Voice and video mailboxes..........................................88 Answer or decline a call................................................88 Make a video call...........................................................89 Answer or decline a video call.....................................90 Internet calls..................................................................90 Log..................................................................................92 Contacts (phonebook)................................93 Save and edit names and numbers.............................93 Add ringing tones for contacts....................................93 Copy contacts.................................................................94 Applications folder.....................................95 Calculator.......................................................................95 Application manager....................................................95 Tools folder................................................98 File manager..................................................................98 Memory card tool..........................................................98 Settings......................................................99 General settings............................................................99 Phone settings............................................................103 Connection settings....................................................105 Battery information.................................109 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s t n e t n o C Charging and discharging..........................................109 Nokia battery authentication guidelines.................110 Care and maintenance.............................112 Disposal........................................................................113 Additional safety information.................114 Small children..............................................................114 Operating environment..............................................114 Medical devices...........................................................114 Vehicles........................................................................115 Potentially explosive environments.........................116 Emergency calls...........................................................116 Certification information (SAR)..................................117 Index........................................................118 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be susceptible to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna areas unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. y t e f a s r u o y r o F 7 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y t e f a s r u o y r o F 8 BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone function of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the standby mode. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your service provider for more information about networks. The 2100 MHz UMTS (HSDPA) is not used in North America and has been turned off in your device. To activate the 2100 MHz UMTS frequency for use outside North America, press
, and select Tools >
Settings > Phone > Network > Network mode >
Dual mode. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Not all networks support all features offered in this device. For instance, video calls, video sharing, push-
to-talk, and instant messaging are not compatible with the networks in the United States of America. Copyright protections may prevent some images, music (including ringing tones), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports internet connections and other methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to viruses, malicious messages and applications, and other harmful content. Exercise caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests, download content, and accept installations only from trustworthy sources. To increase the security of your devices, consider installing, using, and regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. During extended operation, such as an active video sharing session or high-speed data connection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this condition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. You may also access other third-party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, you should take precautions for security or content. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the phone you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use network services. For instance, some networks may not support all language-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a special configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, and e-mail require network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the DC-4, AC-4, or AC-5 charger and from an AC-1, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, or LCH-12 charger when used with the CA-44 charger adapter. The battery intended for use with this device is BP-6MT. y t e f a s r u o y r o F 9 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y t e f a s r u o y r o F Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. 10 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Get connected Nokia N82 supports the following connectivity methods:
2G and 3G networks Bluetooth connectivity to transfer files and connect to compatible enhancements. See
"Bluetooth connectivity," p. 62. Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) to connect to compatible headsets, headphones, TVs, or home stereo sets. See "TV-out mode," p. 38. USB data cable to connect to compatible devices, such as printers and PCs. See
"USB," p. 65. Wireless LAN (WLAN) to connect to the internet and WLAN enabled devices. See "Wireless LAN," p. 60. GPS to connect to GPS satellites to measure your location. See "Positioning (GPS)," p. 45. d e t c e n n o c t e G 11 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i l u f e s U 12 Useful information Model number: Nokia N82-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N82. For local services and warranty information, please refer to the separate booklet. Help Your device has context-sensitive help. When an application is open, select Options > Help to access help for the current view. When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold To open help from the main menu, select Tools >
Utilities > Help. Select the desired application to view its help topics. Get started See the get started guide for keys and parts information, instructions for setting up the device and for other essential information. Extended user guide An extended version of this user guide is available on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Some applications or functionalities, for example, the applications in the Office folder, are explained only in the extended user guide. Additional applications There are various applications provided by Nokia and different third-party software developers that help you do more with your device. These applications are explained in the guides that are available on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer new features, enhanced functions, or improved performance. You may be able to request these updates through the Nokia Software Updater PC application. To update the device software, you need the Nokia Software Updater application and a Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista operating system, broadband internet access, and a compatible data cable to connect your device to the PC. To get more information and to download the Nokia Software Updater application, visit www.nokiausa.com/softwareupdate in the United States or www.latinoamerica.nokia.com/nsu in Latin America. Tip: To check the software version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mode. Settings Your device normally has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile internet settings automatically configured in the device, based upon your network service provider information. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request the settings from the network service providers as a special message. You can change the general settings in your device, such as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. See "General settings," p. 99. Access codes If you forget any of the access codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification number (PIN) code This code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. UPIN code This code may be supplied with the USIM card. The USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. PIN2 code This code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your device. Lock code (also known as security code) This code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorised use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345. To avoid unauthorised use of your device, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from your device. Try entering the code only once, if you forget the code. If the code you entered is not correct, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider for further instructions. Personal unblocking key (PUK) code and PUK2 code These codes (8 digits) are required to n o i t a m r o f n i l u f e s U 13 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i l u f e s U 14 change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your device. UPUK code This code (8 digits) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Prolong battery life Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, note the following:
Features that use Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power. Turn Bluetooth technology off when you do not need it. Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power. WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to connect, not connected to an access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce battery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. If you have set Packet data connection to When available in connection settings, and there is no packet data coverage (GPRS), the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. To prolong the operating time of your device, select Packet data connection >
When needed. The Maps application downloads new map information when you scroll to new areas on the map, which increases the demand on battery power. You can prevent the automatic download of new maps. See "Maps," p. 47. If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeatedly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the network settings, the device searches for the UMTS network. You can set the device to use only the GSM network. See "Network settings," p. 104. The backlight of the display increases the demand on battery power. In the display settings, you can change the time-out after which the backlight is switched off, and adjust the light sensor that observes lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness. See
"Personalisation settings," p. 99. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Leaving applications running in the background increases the demand on battery power. To close the applications you do not use, press and hold
, scroll to an application in the list, and press C. Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Music player, select it from the list and Options >
Exit. Free memory Many features of the device use memory to store data. The device notifies you if the device memory or the memory card memory (if available) is low. To view how much memory different data types consume, press details. To free device memory, transfer data to a compatible memory card (if available) or to a compatible PC. To remove data you no longer need, use File manager or go to the respective application. You can remove the following:
Messages in the folders in Messaging and
, and select Options > Memory retrieved e-mail messages from the mailbox Saved web pages Contact information Calendar notes Applications shown in Application manager that you do not need Installation files (.sis or .sisx) of applications you have installed. Back up the installation files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. Images and video clips in Gallery. Back up the files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. If you are deleting multiple items and Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data from phone memory. is shown, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest items. n o i t a m r o f n i l u f e s U 15 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Your device Welcome When you switch on your device, the Welcome application is displayed. Select from the following:
Sett. wizard to configure various settings, such as e-mail. For more information on the Settings wizard application, see the guides available at the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Switch to transfer content, such as contacts and calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. See "Transfer content," p. 16. There may also be a demonstration about your device available in the Welcome application.
, To access the Welcome application later, press and select Tools > Utilities > Welcome. You can also access the individual applications from their menu locations. e c i v e d r u o Y 16 Transfer content With the Switch application, you can transfer content, such as contacts, between two compatible Nokia devices using Bluetooth connectivity. The type of content that can be transferred depends on the model of the device from which you want to transfer content. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also synchronise data between the other device and your device. Your device notifies you if the other device is not compatible. If the other device cannot be powered on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SIM card, the offline profile is automatically activated. Transfer content 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, selectSwitch in the
, and select Welcome application, or press Tools > Utilities > Switch. 2. Select the connection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both devices must support the selected connection type. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black 3. If you select Bluetooth connectivity: To have your device search for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Continue. Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are asked to enter a code on your device. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK. Enter the same code on the other device, and select OK. The devices are now paired. See "Pair devices," p. 64. For some device models, the Switch application is sent to the other device as a message. To install the Switch application on the other device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. 4. From your device, select the content you want to transfer from the other device. Once the transfer has started, you can cancel it and continue later. Transferring time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM network
(network service). The device is being used in a UMTS network
(network service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote There are messages waiting to be sent in the mailbox. Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type is set to silent, and the message alert tone and e-mail alert tone are set to off. The device keypad is locked. A clock alarm is active. The second phone line is being used (network service). All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service). If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A compatible headset is connected to the device. A compatible TV out cable is connected to the device. A compatible text phone is connected to the device. A data call is active (network service). e c i v e d r u o Y 17 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c i v e d r u o Y 18 A GPRS packet data connection is active (network indicates the connection is on hold and service). that a connection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that supports EGPRS (network service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the network, but your device is not necessarily using EGPRS in the data transfer. A UMTS packet data connection is active (network service). indicates the connection is on hold and that a connection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates that a connection the connection is on hold and is available. See "Fast downloading," p. 18. You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). See "About WLAN," p. 60. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that has encryption. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not have encryption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. See "Bluetooth connectivity," p. 62. Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indicator is blinking, your device is trying to connect with another device. A USB connection is active. Fast downloading High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA, also called 3.5G, indicated by
) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the device is connected to a UMTS network that supports HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, and browser pages through the cellular network may be faster. An
. See active HSDPA connection is indicated by
"Display indicators," p. 17. You can activate or deactivate support for HSDPA in the device settings. See "Packet data settings," p. 107. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the download speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Shortcuts When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use the number keys, #, and * to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press 2 to open Messaging, or # to open the application or folder in the corresponding location in the menu. To switch between open applications, press and
. Leaving applications running in the hold background increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. once. To open Gallery, press To open the multimedia menu to view the multimedia content you have used most frequently in your device, press the multimedia key. To start a web connection (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0. In many applications, to view the most used option items, press the scroll key. To change the profile, press the power key, and select a profile. To switch between the General and Silent profiles, in the standby mode, press and hold #. If you have two phone lines (network service), this action switches between the two lines. To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the standby mode, press and hold 1. To open the last dialled numbers list, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key. Multimedia menu With the multimedia menu, you can view your most frequently used multimedia content. The selected content is shown in the appropriate application. 1. To open or close the multimedia menu, press the multimedia key. 2. To browse the tiles, scroll left or right. The tiles are the following:
Music Enter Music player and the Now playing view, browse your songs and play lists, or download and manage podcasts. Gallery View your last taken picture, start a slide e c i v e d r u o Y 19 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black show of your images, or view media files in albums. Games Try out N-Gage games. Maps View your favourite locations in the Internet View your favourite web links in Contacts Add your own contacts, send Maps application. the browser. messages, or make voice calls. To add a new contact to an empty position on the list, press the scroll key, and select a contact. To send a message, in the multimedia menu, select a contact, and Send text message or Send multimedia msg.. 3. To scroll up or down in a tile, press the scroll key up or down. To select items, press the scroll key. To change the order of the tiles, select Options >
Arrange tiles. To return to the multimedia menu from an open application, press the multimedia key. Mobile Search Press
, and select Search. Use Mobile Search to get access to search engines and find and connect to local services, websites, images, and mobile content. You can also search e c i v e d r u o Y 20 content in your device, such as calendar entries, e-
mail, and other messages. For more information, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Games You can play high-quality multiplayer N-Gage games with your device. Your device includes either one of the following applications in the main menu:
Discover N-Gage application With this preview application you can get information about the upcoming N-Gage gaming experience, try out game demos, and download and install the full N-Gage application when it becomes available. application gives you access to the complete N-
Gage experience replacing the Discover N-Gage application in the menu. You can find new games, try and buy games, find other players, and access scores, events, chat, and more. Some features may not be available at the time of software installation on your device, check www.n-gage.com for software updates. N-Gage application The full featured For the full N-Gage experience, you need internet access on your device, either through the cellular network or wireless LAN. Contact your service provider for more information on data services. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black For more information, visit www.n-gage.com. Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your device. You may need to select the cable mode. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use the headset where it can endanger your safety. If a headset does not include a microphone, for handsfree phone calls, use such a headset with a compatible remote control unit or the microphone of the device. You can also connect a compatible TV-out cable to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) of your device. Do not connect products that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. Do not connect any voltage source to the Nokia AV Connector. When connecting any external device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Connector, pay special attention to volume levels. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distance without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeaker during a call, select Options > Activate loudspeaker. To turn off the loudspeaker, select Options >
Activate handset. Offline profile To activate the offline profile, press the power key briefly, and select Offline. e c i v e d r u o Y 21 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The offline profile lets you use the device without connecting to the wireless network. When you activate the offline profile, the connection to the in wireless network is turned off, as indicated by the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to send messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. When the offline profile is active, you can use your device without a SIM card. Important: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code. To leave the offline profile, press the power key briefly, and select another profile. The device re-
enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). e c i v e d r u o Y 22 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Camera About the camera Your Nokia N82 has two cameras, a high resolution camera on the back of the device (the main camera, up to 5 megapixels, in landscape mode) and a lower resolution camera on the front (the secondary camera in portrait mode). You can use both cameras to take still pictures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture resolution of 2592x1944 pixels. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clips are automatically saved in Images & videos in Gallery. The cameras produce .jpeg images. Video clips are recorded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3gp file extension (sharing quality). See "Video settings," p. 33. You can send images and video clips in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or by using other connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity or wireless LAN connection. You can also upload them to a compatible online album. See
"Share images and videos online," p. 40. a r e m a C Image capture To activate the main camera, open the lens cover by using the camera activation switch. To activate the main camera when the lens cover is already open, press and hold the capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Still image camera indicators The still image camera viewfinder displays the following:
1 Capture mode indicator 2 Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during image capture. See "Active toolbar," p. 24. 23 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C 24 3 Battery charge level indicator 4 Image resolution indicator, which indicates whether the quality of the image is Print 5M -
Large, Print 3M - Medium, Print 2M - Medium, E-
mail 0.8M - Med., or MMS 0.3M - Small. The quality of a digitally zoomed picture is lower than that of an unzoomed picture. 5 Image counter, which displays the estimated number of images you can capture using the current image quality setting and memory in use. The counter is not displayed during image capture.
) and memory card (
6 The device memory (
indicators, which show where images are saved 7 Xenon flash indicator, which is shown blinking only when the xenon flash is charging Active toolbar The active toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and after taking a picture or recording a video. Scroll to items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. You can also define when the active toolbar is visible on the display. The settings in the active toolbar return to the default settings after you close the camera. To view the active toolbar before and after taking a picture or recording a video, select Options >
Show icons. To view the active toolbar only when
) you need it, select Options > Hide icons. Only the capture mode and battery level indicators are shown on the display. To activate the active toolbar, press the scroll key. The toolbar is visible for 5 seconds. Before taking a picture or recording a video, in the active toolbar, select from the following:
to switch between the video and image modes to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) to activate the self-timer (images only). to activate the sequence mode (images only). to select a colour effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) only) to adjust white balance to adjust the exposure compensation (images to adjust sharpness (images only) to adjust contrast (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons change to reflect the current status of the setting. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The available options vary depending on the capture mode and view you are in. See "After taking a picture," p. 26. See "After recording a video," p. 30. The active toolbar in Gallery has different options. See "Active toolbar," p. 35. Take pictures Before taking a picture, note the following:
You cannot take pictures until the xenon flash is fully charged, unless you have set the flash to Off. When the flash is charging, blinks on the display. Charging the xenon flash usually takes a couple of seconds. To make lighting and colour adjustments, use the scroll key to scroll through the active toolbar. See
"Setup settingsadjust colour and lighting," p. 32. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. To free memory for new pictures, transfer files to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for example, and delete the files from your device. The device informs you when the memory is full, and asks whether you want to change the memory in use. When taking a picture, note the following:
Use both hands to keep the camera still. The quality of a digitally zoomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. The camera goes into the battery saving mode if there are no keypresses for a moment. To continue taking pictures, press the capture key. To take a picture, do the following:
1. If the camera is in the video mode, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 2. To lock the focus on an object, press the capture key halfway down (main camera only, not available in landscape and sports scenes). The green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, the red focus indicator appears. Release the capture key, and press it halfway down again. You can, however, take the picture without locking the focus. 3. To take a picture, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved. To zoom in or out when taking a picture, use the zoom key in your device. Tip: To open Gallery and view the pictures you on the side of your have taken, press device twice. a r e m a C 25 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C 26 To activate the front camera, select Options > Use secondary camera. To take a picture, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. To leave the camera open in the background and
. To return to the use other applications, press camera, press and hold the capture key. After taking a picture Select the following from the active toolbar
(available only if you select Show captured image > On in the still image camera settings):
If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete (
). To send the image using a multimedia message,
). See "Write and send e-mail, or other connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity, press the call key, or select Send (
messages," p. 79. This option is not available during an active call. You can also send the image to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller (
(only available during an active call).
) To tag images to the print basket for later
). printing, select Add to Print basket (
To send the image to a compatible online album,
(available only if you have set up an select account for a compatible online album). See
"Share images and videos online," p. 40. To zoom in an image after taking it, press to open the image in Gallery, and select the zooming option from the options list. To use the image as wallpaper in the active standby, select Options > Set as wallpaper. To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Options > Set as contact call img. > Assign to contact. To return to the viewfinder to capture a new image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available only in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device has a xenon flash for low light conditions. The xenon flash is not available in the sports scene and sequence mode. You cannot take pictures if the xenon flash is not fully charged, unless you have set the flash toOff. blinks on the display. When the flash is charging, Charging the xenon flash usually takes a couple of seconds. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
), and Off (
), Red-eye (
The following flash modes are available for the still image camera: Automatic (
), On
To change the flash mode, in the active toolbar, select the desired flash mode. Scenes Scenes are only available in the main camera. A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the current environment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. The default scene in the image mode is Auto, and in the video mode Automatic (both indicated with
). To change the scene, in the active toolbar, select Scene modes and a scene. To make your own scene suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined, and select Options > Change. In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and colour settings. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes and return to the scenes list, press Back. To activate your own scene, scroll to User defined, press the scroll key, and select Select. Take pictures in a sequence The sequence mode is available only in the main camera. To set the camera to take six pictures or the desired number of pictures in sequence (if enough memory is available), in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode. To take six pictures, select Burst. To capture the pictures, press the capture key. To take two or more pictures in a sequence, select the desired time interval. To capture pictures using the selected time interval, press the capture key. To stop taking pictures, select Cancel. The number of pictures taken depends on the available memory. After you take the pictures in the burst mode, they are shown in a grid on the display. To view a picture, press the scroll key to open it. If you used a time interval, only the last taken picture is shown on the display. You can view the other pictures in Images
& videos in Gallery. You can also use the sequence mode with the self-
timer. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key. To switch off the sequence mode, in the active toolbar, select Sequence mode > Single shot. a r e m a C 27 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C 28 You in the pictureself-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-timer to delay the capture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 seconds, 10 seconds, or 20 seconds. To activate the self-timer, select Activate. The device beeps when the timer is running and the quadrangle blinks just before the image capture. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > Off. Tip: In the active toolbar, select Self timer >
2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Tips on taking good photographs Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quality. The camera has several picture quality modes. Use the highest setting to make sure that the camera produces the best picture quality available. Note however, that better picture quality requires more storage space. For multimedia message (MMS) and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use the smallest picture quality mode optimised for MMS sending. You can define the quality in the camera settings. See "Still image camera settings," p. 31. Background Use a simple background. For portraits and other pictures with people, avoid having your subject in front of a cluttered, complex background that may distract attention from the subject. Move the camera, or the subject, when these conditions cannot be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer portraits. Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your pictures by placing objects in the foreground. If the foreground object is too close to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the source, amount, and direction of light can change photographs dramatically. Here are some typical lighting conditions:
Light source behind the subject. Avoid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the subject or visible in the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted light effects. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too much contrast. Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause the subjects to squint their eyes. The contrast may also be too high. Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy day or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording To activate the main camera, open the lens cover by using the camera activation switch. To activate the main camera when the lens cover is already open, press and hold the capture key. To close the main camera, close the lens cover. Video capture indicators The video viewfinder displays the following:
a r e m a C 29 1 Capture mode indicator 2 Audio mute on indicator 3 Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during recording. See "Active toolbar," p. 24. 4 The battery charge level indicator 5 Video quality indicator that indicates whether the quality of the video is TV high quality, TV normal quality, E-mail high quality, E-mail norm. quality, or Sharing quality 6 The video clip file type 7 Total available video recording time. When you are recording, the current video length indicator also shows the elapsed time and time remaining. 8 The device memory (
) and memory card (
indicators that show where videos are saved 9 The video stabilisation is turned on (
"Video settings," p. 33.
). See
) Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a r e m a C 30 To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Show icons. Select Hide icons to display only the video status indicators, and during the recording, the available record time, zoom bar when zooming, and the selection keys. Record videos Before recording a video, note the following:
To make lighting and colour adjustments, scroll through the active toolbar. See "Setup settings adjust colour and lighting," p. 32. To free memory for new video clips, transfer files to a compatible PC using a compatible USB data cable, for example, and remove the files from your device. The device informs you when the memory is full, and asks whether you want to change the memory in use. To record a video, do the following:
1. If the camera is in the image mode, select the video mode from the active toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the capture key. The red record icon (
indicating that recording has started.
) is shown and a tone sounds, 3. To pause recording at any time, press Pause. Video recording automatically stops if recording is set to pause and there are no keypresses within a minute. Select Continue to resume recording. To zoom in or out of the subject, use the zoom key in your device. 4. To stop recording, select Stop. The video clip is automatically saved to the Images & videos folder of Gallery. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. To activate the front camera, select Options > Use secondary camera. To start recording a video, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. After recording a video After you record a video clip, select the following from the active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set to On in the video settings):
To immediately play the video clip you just recorded, select Play (
). If you do not want to keep the video, select Delete (
). To send the video clip using a multimedia message, e-mail, or other connection methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity, press the call key,
). See "Write and send or select Send (
messages," p. 79. See "Send data using Bluetooth connectivity," p. 64. This option is not available during an active call. You may not Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black be able to send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a call recipient during an active call. Select Send to caller (
(only available during an active call). To upload the video clip to a compatible online album, select
(only available if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). See "Share images and videos online," p. 40. To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the camera:
setup settings and main settings. The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To adjust the setup settings, use the options in the active toolbar. See
"Setup settingsadjust colour and lighting," p. 32. To change the main settings, in the image or video mode, select Options >
Settings. Still image camera settings To change the main settings, in the image mode, select Options > Settings and from the following:
Image quality Select Print 5M - Large
(2592x1944 resolution), Print 3M - Medium
(2048x1536 resolution), Print 2M - Medium
(1600x1200 resolution), E-mail 0.8M - Med.
(1024x768 resolution), or MMS 0.3M - Small
(640x480 resolution). The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. If you want to print the image, select Print 5M -
Large, Print 3M - Medium, or Print 2M -
Medium. If you want to send it using e-mail, select E-mail 0.8M - Med.. To send the image using a multimedia message, select MMS 0.3M -
Small. These resolutions are only available in the main camera. Add to album Select whether you want to save the image to a certain album in Gallery. If you select Yes, a list of available albums opens. Show captured image Select On if you want to see the captured image after it is taken or Off if you want to continue taking pictures immediately. Default image name Define the default name for the captured images. Extended digital zoom (main camera only) On (continuous) allows the zoom increments to be smooth and continuous between digital and extended digital zoom, On (paused) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and a r e m a C 31 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Restore camera settings Select Yes to return extended digital step point, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. Capture tone Select the tone you want to hear when you take a picture. Memory in use Select where you want to store your images. Rotate image Select whether you want images that are captured when the device is held upright to be rotated when you open them in Gallery. the default values to the camera settings. Setup settingsadjust colour and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colours and lighting more accurately or to add effects to your pictures or videos, scroll through the active toolbar, and select from the following options:
Flash mode (
Colour tone (
White balance (
desired flash mode. the list. lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately.
) (images only) Select the
) Select a colour effect from
) Select the current a r e m a C 32 Exposure compensation (
) (images
) (images only) Increase
) (images only) Adjust the
) (images only) Adjust the Sharpness (
Contrast (
only) If you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such as snow, adjust the exposure to +1 or +2 to compensate the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. sharpness of the image. difference between the lightest and darkest parts of the image. Light sensitivity (
the light sensitivity in low light conditions to decrease the risk of images that are too dark. The screen display changes to match any settings you make so that you see how the change affects the pictures or videos. The available settings vary depending on the selected camera. The setup settings are camera specific; if you change the settings in the secondary camera, the settings in the main camera do not change. The setup settings are also shooting mode specific; if you change the settings in the image mode, the settings in the video mode do not change. Switching between the modes does not reset the defined setup settings. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The setup settings return to the default settings when you close the camera. If you select a new scene, the colour and lighting settings are replaced by the selected scene. You can change the setup settings after selecting a scene if needed. For more information on the scenes, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Video settings To change the main settings, in the video mode, select Options > Settings and from the following:
Video quality Set the quality of the video clip to TV high quality, TV normal quality, E-mail high quality, E-mail norm. quality (standard quality for playback through your handset), or Sharing quality. If you want to view the video on a compatible TV or PC, select TV high quality or TV normal quality, which have VGA resolution (640x480) and the .mp4 file format. You may not be able to send video clips saved in the .mp4 file format in a multimedia message. To send the video clip using a multimedia message, select Sharing quality, which has QCIF resolution and the .3gp file format. Video stabilisation Select On to reduce camera shaking when recording the video. a r e m a C Audio recording Select Mute if you do not want to record sound. Add to album Select whether you want to add the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery. Select Yes to open a list of available albums. Show captured video Select whether you want the first frame of the recorded video clip to be displayed after the recording stops. Select Play from the active toolbar (main camera) or Options > Play (secondary camera) to view the video clip. Default video name Define the default name for the captured video clips. Memory in use Select where you want to store your videos. Restore camera settings Select Yes to return the default values to the camera settings. 33 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G Gallery To store and organise your images, video clips, sound clips, and streaming links, or share your files with other compatible Universal Plug and Play
(UPnP) devices through wireless LAN (WLAN), press
, and select Gallery. Tip: If you are in another application, to view the last saved picture in Gallery, press on the side of your device. To enter the Images & videos folder main view, press the review key again.
, and select Gallery. View and organise files Press In Gallery, select Images & videos
, Streaming links Sound clips Presentations key to open it.
, or All files
, Tracks
, and press the scroll You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. You can also create albums and mark, copy, and add items to albums. See
"Albums," p. 36. Files stored on your compatible memory card
(if inserted) are indicated with To open a file, press the scroll key. Video clips, .ram files, and streaming links open and play in RealPlayer, and music and sound clips in Music player. See "RealPlayer ," p. 75. See
"Music player," p. 70. To copy or move files to the memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, select a file and Options > Move and copy > Copy to memory card or Move to memory card, or Copy to phone mem. or Move to phone mem.. 34 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
, and Images and video clips View images and videos To view your images and video clips, press select Gallery > Images & videos. Pictures taken and video clips recorded with the camera of your device are stored in Images &
videos. Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Bluetooth connectivity. To be able to view a received image or video clip in Gallery or in the RealPlayer, you must first save it. The video clips saved in Nokia Video Centre are not shown in Images & videos in Gallery. See "Nokia Video Centre," p. 67. The images and video clip files in Images & videos are in a loop and ordered by date and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files one by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. To open a file, press the scroll key. When an image is opened, to zoom in the image, press the zoom key on the side of your device. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. If you want the display to be automatically rotated based on the orientation of the device, set the display rotation on in the settings. See
"Personalisation settings," p. 99. To edit a video clip or a photo, select Options >
Edit. Active toolbar In the Images & videos folder, you can use the active toolbar as a shortcut to different tasks. The active toolbar is available only when you have selected an image or a video clip. In the active toolbar, scroll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. The settings in the active toolbar return to the default settings after you close the camera. If you want the active toolbar to always be visible on the display, select Options > Show icons. y r e l l a G 35 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G 36 To view the active toolbar only when you need it, select Options > Hide icons. To activate the active toolbar, press the scroll key. Select from the following:
to play the selected video clip to send the selected image or video clip to upload the selected image or video clip to a compatible online album (only available if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). See "Share images and videos online," p. 40. to add or remove an image from the print or basket. to print the viewed image to start a slide show of your images to delete the selected image or video clip The available options may vary depending on the view you are in. Albums With albums, you can conveniently manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list in Gallery, select Images & videos > Options >
Albums > View albums. To create a new album, in the albums list view, select Options > New album. To add a picture or a video clip to an album in Gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Albums > Add to album. A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip. The item you added to the album is still visible in Images & videos in Gallery. To remove a file from an album, open the album, scroll to the file, and press C. The file is not deleted from Images & videos in Gallery. Slide show To view your images as a slide show, select an image in Gallery, and Start slide show (
active toolbar. The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only the selected images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images, and Options > Slide show > Start to start the slide show. Select from the following:
Pause to pause the slide show Continue to resume the slide show, if paused End to close the slide show To browse the images, scroll left or right.
) in the Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black On or Off. Before starting the slide show, adjust the slide show settings. Select Options > Slide show >
Settings, and from the following:
Music to add sound to the slide show. Select Song to select a music file from the list Delay between slides to adjust the tempo of the slide show Zoom and pan to make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to another, and let Gallery randomly zoom in and out in the images To decrease or increase the volume during the slide show, use the volume key in your device. Edit images Image editor To edit the pictures after taking them or the ones already saved in Gallery, select Options > Edit. The image editor opens. Select Options > Apply effect to open a grid where you can select different edit options indicated by small icons. You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text, clip art, or a frame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop, and a predefined aspect ratio from the list. To crop the image size manually, select Manual. If you select Manual, a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and select Set. Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adjust the first selected area, select Back. The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefined aspect ratio, select the upper left corner of the area to be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll key. To freeze the selected area, press the scroll key. To move the area within the picture, use the scroll key. To select the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Options >
Apply effect > Red eye reduction. Move the cross onto the eye, and press the scroll key. A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, use the scroll key. To reduce the redness, press the scroll key. When you finish editing the image, press Done. y r e l l a G 37 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G 38 To save the changes, and return to Images &
videos, press Back. Useful shortcuts You can use the following shortcuts when editing images:
To view a full-screen image, press *. To return to the normal view, press * again. To rotate an image clockwise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1. To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0. To move on a zoomed image, scroll up, down, left, or right. Edit videos To edit video clips in Gallery, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit and an editing option. The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 video file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. TV-out mode To view the captured images and video clips on a compatible TV, use a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable. Before viewing the images and video clips on TV, you may need to configure the TV-out settings for the applicable TV system and TV aspect ratio. See
"Enhancement settings," p. 100. To watch images and video clips on TV, do the following:
1. Connect a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the video input of a compatible TV. 2. Connect the other end of the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to the Nokia AV Connector of your device. 3. You may need to select the cable mode.
, and select Gallery > Images &
4. Press videos and the file you want to view. The images are shown in the image viewer, and the video clips are played in RealPlayer. All audio, including the active calls, stereo video clip sound, key tone, and ringing tone is routed to the TV when the Nokia Video Connectivity Cable is connected to the device. You can use the device microphone normally. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black For all applications other than the Images &
videos folder in Gallery and RealPlayer, the TV screen displays what is displayed on the screen of your device. The opened image is displayed in full-screen on the TV. When you open an image in the thumbnail view while it is viewed on the TV, zooming in is not available. When you open a highlighted video clip, RealPlayer starts playing the video clip on the device display and the TV screen. See "RealPlayer ," p. 75. You can view images as a slide show on TV. All items in an album or marked images are displayed on the TV in full-screen while the selected music plays. See
"Slide show," p. 36. Presentations With presentations, you can view SVG (scalable vector graphics) files, such as cartoons and maps. SVG images maintain their appearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view SVG files, press Presentations. Scroll to an image, and select Options > Play. To pause playing, select Options > Pause. To zoom in, press 5. To zoom out, press 0.
, and select Gallery >
To rotate the image 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3, respectively. To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9. To switch between full and normal screen, press *. Print images Image print To print images with Image print, select the image you want to print, and the print option in Gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your images using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth connectivity. You can also print images using wireless LAN. If a compatible memory card is inserted, you can store the images to the memory card, and print them using a compatible printer. You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print, select the image you want to print, and the print option in Gallery, camera, image editor, or image viewer. When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed after you y r e l l a G 39 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black select the image. Select a printer. The printer is set as the default printer. To print to a printer compatible with PictBridge, connect the compatible data cable before you select the print option, and check that the data cable mode is set to Image print or Ask on connection. See
"USB," p. 65. The printer is automatically displayed when you select the print option. If the default printer is not available, a list of available printing devices is displayed. To change the default printer, select Options >
Settings > Default printer. Print preview After you select the printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left or right to browse through the available layouts for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. Print settings The available options vary depending on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printer. y r e l l a G 40 To select the paper size, select Paper size, the size of paper from the list, and OK. Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Print online With Print online, you can order prints of images online directly to your home or to a store where you can pick them up. You can also order different products with the selected image, such as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depend on the service provider. To use Print online, you must have at least one printing service configuration file installed. The files can be obtained from printing service providers that support Print online. For more information on the application, see the guides available at the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Share images and videos online You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in other compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as drafts and continue later, and view the content of the albums. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. Before sharing images and videos online, you must subscribe to the service with an online image sharing service provider, and create a new account. You can usually subscribe to the service on the web page of the service provider. Contact your service provider for details on subscribing to the service. To upload a file from Gallery to the online service,
, and select Gallery > Images & videos. press Scroll to the desired file, and select Options >
from Send > Post to web, or select the file and the active toolbar. For more information on the application and compatible service providers, see the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Home network About home network Your device is compatible with Universal Plug and Play architecture (UPnP). Using a wireless LAN
(WLAN) access point device or a WLAN router, you can create a home network and connect compatible UPnP devices that support WLAN to the network, such as your device, a compatible PC, a compatible printer, and a compatible sound system or TV, or a sound system or TV equipped with a compatible wireless multimedia receiver. For more information on the home network, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Important security information When you configure your WLAN home network, enable an encryption method on your access point device, then on the other devices you intend to connect to your home network. Refer to the documentation of the devices. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from the devices. You can view or change the settings of the WLAN internet access point in your device. See "Access points," p. 105. If you use the ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible device, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN security mode when you configure the internet access point. See "Connection settings," p. 105. This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party joining the ad hoc network. Your device notifies you if another device attempts to connect to it and the home network. Do not accept connection requests from an unknown device. y r e l l a G 41 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G 42 If you use WLAN in a network that does not have encryption, switch off sharing your files with other devices, or do not share any private media files. See
"Settings for home network," p. 42. Settings for home network To share media files saved in Gallery with other compatible UPnP devices through WLAN, you must create and configure your WLAN home internet access point, then configure the settings for home network in the Home media application. See
"WLAN internet access points," p. 61. See
"Connection settings," p. 105. The options related to home network are not available in applications before the settings in the Home media application have been configured. When you access the Home media application for the first time, the setup wizard opens and helps you define the home network settings for your device. To use the setup wizard later, in the Home media main view, select Options > Run wizard, and follow the instructions on the display. To connect a compatible PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the related software. You get the software from the CD-ROM or DVD-ROM supplied with your device, or you can download it from the device support pages on the Nokia website. Configure settings To configure the settings for home network, select Tools > Connectivity > Home media >
Settings and from the following:
Home access point Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for the home access point every time you connect to the home network, Create new to define a new access point that is used automatically when you use the home network, or None. If your home network does not have WLAN security settings enabled, you get a security warning. You can continue and switch the WLAN security on later; or cancel defining the access point and first switch on the WLAN security. See "Access points," p. 105. Device name Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compatible devices in the home network. Copy to Select the memory where you want to save copied media files. Set sharing on and define content Select Tools > Connectivity > Home media >
Share content and from the following:
Content sharing Allow or deny sharing media files with compatible devices. Do not set content sharing on before you have configured all the other settings. If you set content sharing on, the Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black other UPnP compatible devices in the home network can view and copy your files you have selected for sharing in the Images & videos folder. If you do not want the other devices to access your files, set content sharing off. Images & video Select media files for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing status of images and videos. To update the content of the folder, select Options > Refresh content. Music Select playlists for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing content of playlists. To update the content of the folder, select Options > Refresh content. View and share media files To share your media files with other UPnP compatible devices in the home network, set content sharing on. See "Set sharing on and define content," p. 42. If content sharing is off in your device, you can still view and copy the media files stored in another home network device if it is allowed by the other device. Show media files stored in your device To show your images, videos, and sound clips in another home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following:
1. In Gallery, select an image, video clip, or sound clip, and Options > Show via home network. 2. Select a compatible device in which the media file is shown. The images are shown both in the other home network device and your device, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. showing. 3. To stop sharing, select Options > Stop Show media files stored in the other device To show media files that are stored on another home network device in your device (or in a compatible TV, for example), do the following:
1. Press
, and select Tools > Connectivity >
Home media > Browse home. Your device starts the search of other compatible devices. Device names start to appear on the display. 2. Select a device from the list. 3. Select the type of media you want to view from the other device. The available file types depend on the features of the other device. To search files with different criteria, select Options > Find. To sort the found files, select Options > Sort by. 4. Select the media file or folder you want to view. y r e l l a G 43 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black y r e l l a G 44 5. Press the scroll key, and select Play or Show, and On device or Via home network. 6. Select the device in which the file is shown. To adjust the volume when playing a video or sound clip, scroll left or right. To stop sharing the media file, select Back or Stop
(available when playing videos and music). Tip: You can print images saved in Gallery through a home network with a UPnP compatible printer. See "Image print," p. 39. Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Copy media files To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Gallery and Options >
Move and copy > Copy to home network or Move to home net.. Content sharing does not have to be switched on. To copy or transfer files from the other device to your device, select a file in the other device and the desired copying option from the options list. Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Positioning (GPS) For information on position requests, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system that includes 24 satellites and their ground stations that monitor the operation of the satellites. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low-power radio signals from the satellites and measures the travel time of the signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of meters. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United States government and is subject to change with the United States Department of Defense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Availability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and weather conditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdoors to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you should never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular radio networks for positioning or navigation. Your device also supports Assisted GPS (A-GPS). Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data connection, which assists in calculating the coordinates of your current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. A-GPS is a network service. Your device is preconfigured to use the Nokia A-GPS service, if no service provider specific A-GPS settings are available. The assistance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service server only when needed. You must have a packet data internet access point defined in the device to retrieve assistance data
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 45 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 46
, and select Tools >
from the Nokia A-GPS service. To define an access point for A-GPS, press Settings > General > Positioning >
Positioning server > Access point. A wireless LAN access point cannot be used for this service. The packet data internet access point is asked when GPS is used for the first time in your device. To enable or disable different positioning methods,
, and select Tools >
such as Bluetooth GPS, press Settings > General > Positioning >
Positioning methods. GPS receiver The GPS receiver is located in the top of the device. When using the receiver, from an upright position, move the device to an angle of about 45 degrees, with an unobstructed view of the sky. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connection in the car may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receiver may drain the battery faster. About satellite signals If your device cannot find the satellite signal, consider the following:
If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. Ensure that your hand does not cover the GPS antenna of your device. See "GPS receiver,"
p. 46. If the weather conditions are bad, the signal strength may be affected. If the power saver turns on while the device is attempting to establish a GPS connection, the attempt is interrupted. Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
, and select Tools >
Satellite status To check how many satellites your device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signals, press Connectivity > GPS data > Position >
Options > Satellite status. Or, in the Maps application, select Options > Map options >
Satellite info. If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. When your device has received enough data from the satellite signal to calculate the coordinates of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the
, and select Maps. coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Maps About Maps Press With Maps, you can see your current location on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and different points of interest, plan routes from one location to another, and save locations as landmarks and send them to compatible devices. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides and a turn-by-turn navigation service with voice guidance. Maps uses GPS. You can define the positioning methods used with your device in the device settings. See "Positioning settings," p. 103. For the most accurate location information, use either the internal GPS or a compatible external GPS receiver. When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to define an internet access point for downloading map information for your current location. To change the default access point later, select Options > Settings > Network > Default access point.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 47 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 48 Almost all digital cartography is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography provided for use in this device. Downloading maps may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Tip: You can also download maps by using a wireless LAN connection or through the internet using Nokia Map Loader PC software. See "Download maps," p. 49. To receive a note when your device registers to a network outside your home cellular network, select Options > Settings > Network > Roaming warning > On. Contact your network service provider for details and roaming costs. Browse maps The map coverage varies by country. When you open the Maps application, Maps zooms in to the location that was saved from your last session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps application zooms in to the capital city of the country you are in based on the information the device receives from the cellular network. At the same time, the map of the location is downloaded, if it has not been downloaded during previous sessions. is shown on the display To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your current location, select Options > Find place >
GPS position [0], or press 0 A GPS indicator when you browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS connection, the circles are yellow. When the device receives enough data from the satellites to calculate the coordinates of your current location, the circles turn green. To view information about satellites when you are using Maps, select Options > Map options >
Satellite info. Your current location is indicated on the map with
. To move on the map, scroll up, down, left, or right. To zoom in or out, press *
or #. To switch between the 2D and 3D views, select Options > Map options > 2D/3D. To find a location, select Options > Find place. You can choose to go to your GPS position, find an address, find a point of Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black interest by entering a keyword, find locations nearby, or browse a guide (extra service). To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting point for a nearby search, to plan a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra service), press the scroll key, and select the desired option. When you browse the map on the display, for example, move to another country, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your service provider. The maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). To define what kinds of points of interest are shown on the map, select Options > Map options >
Categories and the desired categories. To save a location as a landmark, in the desired location, press the scroll key, select Save > As landmark, enter a name for the landmark, and select the categories you want to include it in. To take a screen shot of your location, select Save >
As image. The screen shot is saved in Gallery. To send the screen shot, in Gallery, select the screen shot, and from the active toolbar. To view saved landmarks, select Options > Find place > Landmark. To send a landmark to a compatible device, in the landmarks view, press the scroll key, and select Send. If you send the landmark in a text message, the information is converted to plain text. To adjust the network, routing, and general settings, select Options > Settings. Download maps When you browse the map on the display, for example, move to another country, a new map is downloaded automatically. These downloaded maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contact your service provider. You can view the amount of transferred data from the data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter shows the amount of network traffic when you browse maps, create routes, or search for locations online. To prevent the device from automatically downloading maps through the internet, for example, when you are outside your home cellular network, select Options > Settings > Network >
Use network > Never.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 49 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To define how much memory card space you want to use for saving maps or voice guidance files, select Options > Settings > Network > Max. memory card use (%). This option is available only when a compatible memory card is inserted. When the memory is full, the oldest map data is deleted. The saved maps data can be deleted using Nokia Map Loader PC software. Nokia Map Loader Nokia Map Loader is PC software that you can use to download and install maps for different countries from the internet to your device or a compatible memory card (if inserted). You can also use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn navigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, you must first install it to a compatible PC. You can download the PC software from the internet at www.nokia.com/maps. Follow the instructions on the screen. You must use the Maps application before using Nokia Map Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses the Maps history information to check the version of map data to be downloaded. After you have installed the PC software to your PC, to download maps, do the following:
1. Connect your device to the PC by using a compatible USB data cable. Select Data transfer as the USB connection mode.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 50 2. Open Nokia Map Loader in your PC. Nokia Map Loader checks the version of map data to be downloaded. 3. Select the maps or voice guidance files you want, and download and install them to your device. Find a place To view points of interest near your current location or other locations on the map, select Options >
Find place > Nearby and a category. To search for a point of interest by name, select Options > Find place > Keyword search or start entering the first letters of the name, and select Find. To search for a location by address, select Options > Find place > By address. You must enter the city and country. To use an address you have saved to a contact card in Contacts, select Options > Find place > By address > Options >
Select from contacts. To view a search result on the map, press the scroll key, and select Show on map. To return to the results list, select Back. To view a list of your previous locations, select Options > Find place > Recent. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Plan a route To plan a route from one location to another (for example, from your home to your office), do the following:
1. Scroll to a point on the map, press the scroll key, and select Route from. 2. Scroll to From, and select Options > Select and the desired option. To adjust the routing settings, such as the mode of transportation, select Options > Settings >
Routing. 3. To select the destination, scroll to To, and select Options > Select and the desired option. 4. To view the route itinerary, select Options >
Show route. The route is calculated using the selected routing settings. To view the itinerary route on the map, select Options > Show on map. To run a simulation of the route, select Options >
Start simulation. Tip: You can also use a compatible GPS receiver with Bluetooth connectivity with Maps. For example, in a car, an external GPS receiver can be positioned so that it has a clear view of the sky. Enable the use of an external GPS receiver in positioning settings. See "Positioning settings," p. 103. Extra services for Maps You can purchase and download different kinds of guides, such as city and travel guides, for different cities to your device. You can also purchase a turn-
by-turn navigation service with voice guidance to use it in Maps. The downloaded guides are automatically saved to your device. The licence you purchase for a guide or navigation is device-specific and cannot be transferred from your device to another device. Navigation To purchase a navigation service with voice guidance to use in Maps, select Options > Extra services > Add navigation. After purchasing the navigation upgrade, the service is available through Maps. After creating a route in Maps, to start navigation to the desired destination with GPS using voice guidance, select Options > Start navigation. See
"Plan a route," p. 51. You can also start navigation by selecting any location on the map or in a results list, and Navigate to.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 51 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black When you use navigation for the first time, you are prompted to select the language of the voice guidance and download the voice guidance files of the selected language. You can also download voice guidance files using Nokia Map Loader. See
"Download maps," p. 49. To change the language later, in the Maps main view, select Options >
Settings > General > Voice guidance and a language, and download the voice guidance files for the selected language. To discard the created route and use another route, select Options > Alternative route. To view only the next turns and hide the map, select Options > Map options > Arrow mode. To stop navigation, select Options > Stop navigation. Guides To purchase and download different kinds of guides, such as city and travel guides, for different cities to your device, select Options > Extra services > Guides. The guides provide information about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and other points of interest. The guides must be downloaded and purchased before use. To browse a downloaded guide, on the My guides tab in Guides, select a guide and a subcategory (if available). To download a new guide to your device, in Guides, scroll right to the Nearest guides or All guides tab, select the desired guide, and press Yes. The purchase process starts automatically. You can pay for the guides through a credit card or have the amount charged to your phone bill (if supported by your cellular network service provider). To confirm the purchase, select OK twice. To receive a confirmation of the purchase through e-mail, enter your name and e-mail address, and select OK. Landmarks Press Landmarks. With Landmarks, you can save the position information of specific locations in your device. You can sort the saved locations into different categories, such as business, and add other information to them, such as addresses. You can use your saved landmarks in compatible applications, such as GPS data and Maps.
, and select Tools > Connectivity >
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 52 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black GPS coordinates are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To create a new landmark, select Options > New landmark. To make a positioning request for your current location, select Current position. To enter the position information manually, select Enter manually. To edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address), scroll to a landmark, and select Options > Edit. Scroll to the desired field, and enter the information. To view the landmark on the map, select Options >
Show on map. To create a route to the location, select Options > Navigate using map. You can sort your landmarks into preset categories, and create new categories. To edit and create new landmark categories, scroll right in Landmarks, and select Options > Edit categories. To add a landmark to a category, scroll to the landmark in Landmarks, and select Options > Add to category. Scroll to each category to which you want to add the landmark, and select it. To send one or several landmarks to a compatible device, select Options > Send. Your received landmarks are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging.
, and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS GPS data GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a selected destination, position information about your current location, and traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and approximate duration of travel. Press data. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, the GPS receiver of your device must initially receive position information from at least four satellites to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with three satellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Route guidance Press data > Navigation. Start the route guidance outdoors. If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receive the necessary information from the satellites.
, and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 53 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
, and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS Trip meter Press data > Trip distance. Select Options > Start to activate trip distance calculation, and Stop to deactivate it. The calculated values remain on the display. Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. Select Reset to set the trip distance and time and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation. Select Restart to set the odometer and total time to zero. The trip meter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and quality of GPS signals.
) S P G
g n i n o i t i s o P 54 Route guidance uses a rotating compass on the device display. A red ball shows the direction to the destination, and the approximate distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacles, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken into account when calculating the distance. Route guidance is active only when you move. To set your trip destination, select Options > Set destination and a landmark as the destination, or enter the latitude and longitude coordinates. Select Stop navigation to clear the destination set for your trip. Retrieve position information Press data > Position. In the position view, you can view the position information of your current location. An estimate of the accuracy of the location is displayed. To save your current location as a landmark, select Options > Save position. Landmarks are saved locations with more information, and they can be used in other compatible applications and transferred between compatible devices.
, and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Web browser To browse the web, you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. For more information on the web browser, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Browse the web
, and select Web. Press Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. To browse a web page, in the bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter the address in the field
Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of
), and press the scroll key. memory while loading such a page, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics, to save memory, select Options > Settings > Page >
Load content > Text only. To enter a new web page address you want to visit, select Options > Go to web address. To retrieve the latest content of the page from the server, select Options > Navigation options >
Reload. To save the web address of the current page as a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark. To use visual history to view snapshots of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (available if History list is set on in the browser settings and the current page is not the first page you visit). To go to a previously visited page, select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Options >
Tools > Save page. You can save pages and browse them later when offline. You can also group these saved pages into r e s w o r b b e W 55 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black r e s w o r b b e W 56 folders. To access the pages you have saved, select Options > Bookmarks > Saved pages. To open a sublist of commands or actions for the page that is open, select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). To allow or prevent the automatic opening of multiple windows, select Options > Window >
Block pop-ups or Allow pop-ups. Shortcuts while browsing Press 1 to open your bookmarks. Press 2 to search for keywords in the current page. Press 3 to return to the previous page. Press 5 to list all open windows. Press 8 to show the page overview of the current page. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Press 9 to enter a new web address. Press 0 to go to the home page (if defined in settings). Press * and # to zoom in or out on the page. Tip: To return to the standby mode with the browser open in the background, press twice or the end key. To return to the browser, press and hold from the list.
, and select the browser Navigate pages Mini Map and page overview help you navigate web pages that contain a large amount of information. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the web page you browse. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings >
General > Mini map > On. To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired location, stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and leaves you at the selected location. When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you can also use Page overview to view what kind of information the page contains. To show the page overview of the current page, press 8. To find the desired spot on the page, scroll up, down, left, or right. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are used by the weblog community and news organisations to share the latest headlines or text, for example, Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black news feeds. Blogs or weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feeds use RSS and Atom technologies. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web feed, select Options >
Subscribe. To view the web feeds to which you have subscribed, in the bookmarks view, select Web feeds. To update a web feed, select it and Options >
Refresh. To define how the web feeds are updated, select Options > Settings > Web feeds. Bookmarks The bookmarks view opens when you open the Web application. You can select web addresses from a list or from a collection of bookmarks in the Auto. bookmarks folder. You can also enter the URL address of the web page you want to visit directly into the field (
). indicates the starting page defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the internet. You can also save addresses received in messages to your bookmarks and send saved bookmarks. To open the bookmarks view while browsing, press 1, or select Options > Bookmarks. To edit the details of a bookmark, such as the title, select Options > Bookmark manager > Edit. In the bookmarks view, you can also open other browser folders. The Web application allows you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the content of the pages you have saved offline. Web also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Auto. bookmarks folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web feeds, you can view saved links to web feeds and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web feeds are commonly found on major news organisation web pages, personal weblogs, online communities that offer the latest headlines, and article summaries. Web feeds use RSS and Atom technologies. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the device. r e s w o r b b e W 57 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black r e s w o r b b e W 58 A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear privacy data > Clear cache. End the connection To end the connection and view the browser page offline, select Options > Tools > Disconnect; or to end the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit. To take the browser to the background, press the end key once. To end the connection, press and hold the end key. To delete the information the network server collects about your visits to various web pages, select Options > Clear privacy data > Delete cookies. Connection security If the security indicator (
) is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The service provider secures the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. Web settings
, and select Web. Press Select Options > Settings and from the following:
General settings Access point Change the default access point. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Homepage Define the home page. Mini map Set Mini Map on or off. See "Navigate pages," p. 56. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black History list While browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set History list on. Security warnings Hide or show security notifications. Java/ECMA script Enable or disable the use of scripts. Page settings Load content Select whether you want to load images and other objects while browsing. If you select Text only, to load images or objects later during browsing, select Options > Tools >
Load images. Screen size Select between full screen and the normal view with the options list. Default encoding If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select another encoding according to language for the current page. Block pop-ups Allow or block automatic opening of different pop-ups while browsing. Automatic reload If you want the web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On. Font size Define the font size that is used for web pages. Privacy settings Auto. bookmarks Enable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If you want to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Auto. bookmarks folder, but hide the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder. Form data saving If you do not want the data you enter to different forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time you open the page, select Off. Cookies Enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings Automatic updates Define whether you want the web feeds to be updated automatically and how often you want to update them. Setting the application to retrieve web feeds automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. desired access point for updating. This option is only available when Automatic updates is on. Acc. point for auto-update Select the r e s w o r b b e W 59 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s n o i t c e n n o C 60 Connections Your device offers several options to connect to the internet or to another compatible device or PC. For more information on connectivity, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Wireless LAN Your device supports wireless local area network
(WLAN). With WLAN, you can connect your device to the internet and compatible devices that have WLAN. About WLAN To use WLAN, it must be available in the location, and your device must be connected to the WLAN. Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Features that use WLAN, or that are allowed to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Your device supports the following WLAN features:
IEEE 802.11b/g standard Operation at 2.4 GHz Wired equivalent privacy (WEP) with keys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protected access (WPA), and 802.1x encryption methods. These functions can be used only if they are supported by the network. WLAN connections To use WLAN, you must create an internet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the internet. See "WLAN internet access points," p. 61. Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase the security of your wireless LAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorized access to your data. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN internet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connection. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black You can use WLAN during a voice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check the unique media access control
(MAC) address that identifies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a WLAN and manage your WLAN connections. The WLAN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections in the active standby mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and select it. If the search finds WLANs, for example, WLAN network found is displayed, to create an internet access point (IAP) and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Start Web browsing. If you select a secured WLAN network, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct network name (service set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN. If you are connected to a WLAN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Continue Web browsing. To end the connection in the WLAN, select the status and Disconnect WLAN. If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed. To set scanning on and search for available WLANs, select the status and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, select the status and Search for WLAN. To set WLAN scanning off, select the status and select WLAN scanning off. To access the WLAN wizard application in the menu,
, and select Tools > WLAN wiz.. press WLAN internet access points Press
, and select Tools > WLAN wiz. Select Options and from the following:
Filter WLAN networks Filter out WLANs in the list of found networks. The selected networks are filtered out the next time the application searches for WLANs. s n o i t c e n n o C 61 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s n o i t c e n n o C Details View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an active connection, the connection details are displayed. Define access point Create an internet access point (IAP) in a WLAN. Edit access point Edit the details of an existing IAP. You can also use connection manager to create internet access points. See "Active data connections," p. 62. Connection manager Active data connections Press Conn. mgr. > Active data connections. In the active data connections view, you can see the open data connections:
, and select Tools > Connectivity >
data calls packet data connections WLAN connections Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. 62 To end a connection, select Options >
Disconnect. To close all open connections, select Options > Disconnect all. To view the details of a connection, select Options > Details. The details shown depend on the connection type. Available WLAN networks Press
, and select Tools > Connectivity >
Conn. mgr. > Available WLAN networks. The available WLAN view shows a list of WLANs within range, their network mode (infrastructure or is shown ad hoc), and signal strength indicator. if your device for networks with encryption, and has an active connection in the network. To view the details of a network, select Options >
Details. To create an internet access point in a network, select Options > Define access point. Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth connectivity You can make a wireless connection to other compatible devices with Bluetooth connectivity. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enhancements such as headsets Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black and car kits. You can use Bluetooth connectivity to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; make a wireless connection to your compatible PC (for example, to transfer files); and connect to a compatible printer to print images with Image print. Since devices with Bluetooth wireless technology communicate using radio waves, they do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. However, they must be within 10 metres (33 feet) of each other, although the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 2.0 supporting the following profiles:
Advanced Audio Distribution Profile, Audio/Video Remote Control Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, Basic Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Human Interface Device Profile, Object Push Profile, SIM Access Profile, and Synchronization Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices supporting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider.
, and select Tools > Bluetooth. Features using Bluetooth technology, or allowing such features to run in the background while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connectivity. See "Phone and SIM," p. 101. Settings Press When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. You can change the name later on. Select from the following:
Bluetooth To make a wireless connection to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth connectivity On, then establish a connection. To switch off Bluetooth connectivity, select Off. My phone's visibility To allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology, select Shown to all. To set a time after which the visibility is set from shown to hidden, select Define period. To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden. My phone's name Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluetooth wireless technology. Remote SIM mode To enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhancement, to use s n o i t c e n n o C 63 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s n o i t c e n n o C 64
, and select Tools > Bluetooth. the SIM card in your device to connect to the network, select On. Security tips Press When you are not using Bluetooth connectivity, to control who can find your device and connect to it, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility >
Hidden. Do not pair with or accept connection requests from an unknown device. This protects your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth connections can be active at a time. For example, if you are connected to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. 1. Open the application where the item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery. 2. Select the item and Options > Send > Via Bluetooth. Devices with Bluetooth wireless technology that are within range are displayed. Device icons are as follows:
computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt the search, select Stop. 3. Select the device with which you want to connect. 4. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair devices," p. 64. When the connection is established, Sending data is displayed. Tip: When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique address
(device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create your own passcode (1 to 16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. Devices that do not Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device. Devices that are within range are displayed. 2. Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as well. 3. Some audio enhancements connect automatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise, scroll to the enhancement, and select Options > Connect to audio device. in the device Paired devices are indicated by search. To set a device as authorised or unauthorised, scroll to the device, and select from the following options:
Set as authorised Connections between your device and the authorised device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC or devices that belong indicates authorised to someone you trust. devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised Connection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete. If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options >
Delete all. Receive data using Bluetooth connectivity When you receive data through Bluetooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Messages received through Bluetooth connectivity are indicated by
, and select Tools > Connectivity >
. USB Press USB. To have the device ask the purpose of the connection each time a compatible data cable is connected, select Ask on connection > Yes. If Ask on connection is set to off or you want to change the mode during an active connection, select USB mode and from the following:
s n o i t c e n n o C 65 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black PC Suite Use Nokia PC applications such as Image print Print images on a compatible Media player Synchronise music with Nokia Nseries PC suite, Nokia Lifeblog, and Nokia Software Updater. Data transfer Transfer data between your device and a compatible PC. Use this mode also for downloading maps with the Nokia Map Loader PC application. printer. Windows Media Player. PC connections You can use your device with a variety of compatible PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, transfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from the PC to synchronise with your device. s n o i t c e n n o C 66 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (network service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video services using packet data or WLAN. You can also transfer video clips from a compatible PC to your device and view them in Video Centre. Video Centre supports the same file formats as RealPlayer. All videos are played in the landscape mode by default. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the pricing in the service or from the service provider. Find and view videos 1. Press
, and select Video centre. 2. To connect to a service, scroll left or right, and select the desired video service. e r t n e C o e d i V a i k o N 67 The device updates and displays the content available in the service. 3. To view videos by categories (if available), scroll left or right to view the other tabs. 4. To view information about a video, select Options > Video details. 5. Some video clips can be streamed over the air, but others must be first downloaded to your device. To download a video clip, select Options > Download. To stream a video clip or view a downloaded clip, select Options > Play. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e r t n e C o e d i V a i k o N 68 6. When the clip is playing, use the scroll key and the selection keys to control the player. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Downloads continue in the background if you exit the application. The downloaded videos are saved in Video centre > My videos. To connect to the internet to browse available services that you can add to the main view, select Add new services. Internet videos Internet videos are video clips distributed in the internet using RSS-based feeds. You can add new feeds to Internet videos in the settings. You can view your feeds in the Internet videos folder in Video Centre. To add or delete feeds, select Options > Feed subscriptions. To view the videos available in a feed, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view information about a video, select Options > Video details. To download a video, scroll to it, and select Options > Download. To play the downloaded video, press the scroll key. Play downloaded videos The downloaded videos are saved in Video centre > My videos. To play a downloaded video, press the scroll key. To play a downloaded video in the home network, select Options > Show via home network. Home network must be configured first. See "About home network," p. 41. When the clip is playing, use the scroll key and the selection keys to control the player. If there is not enough free space in the device memory and compatible memory card, the application automatically deletes some of the oldest videos when new videos are downloaded. indicates videos that may soon be deleted. To prevent a video from being automatically deleted (
Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own videos to Video Centre from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. To transfer videos from a compatible PC to the memory card in your device, do the following:
), select Options > Protect. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Parental control Activate the parental lock for video services. Preferred memory Select whether downloaded videos are saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card. If the selected memory becomes full, the device saves the content in the other memory, if available. If there is not enough space in the other memory, the application automatically deletes some of the oldest videos. thumbnail images in video lists. Thumbnails Select whether to view 1. To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device (E:\) where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB data cable. 2. Select Data transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. 3. Select the videos you want to copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the videos to E:\My Videos in the memory card. The transferred videos appear in the My videos folder in Video Centre. Video files in other folders of your device are not displayed. Settings In the Video Centre main view, select Options >
Settings and from the following:
Video service selection Select the video services you want to appear in the main view of the application. You can also view the details of a video service. Some services require a user name and a password that you receive from the service provider. Default access points Select the access points used for the data connection. Using packet data access points to download files may involve Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e r t n e C o e d i V a i k o N 69 l r e d o f c i s u M 70 Music folder For information on radio and Nokia Podcasting, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC
+, eAAC+, MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can also use Music player to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is the method for delivering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music to your device," p. 72. Play a song or a podcast episode You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have updated the song or podcast selection in your device. To add all available items to the library, in the Music player main view, select Options > Refresh. To play a song or a podcast episode, do the following:
1. Press 2. Select Music or Podcasts. 3. Select categories to navigate to the song or
, and select Music > Music player. podcast episode you want to hear. 4. To play the selected files, press the scroll key. To pause playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To fast forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds after a song or podcast has started. To switch random play (
Options > Shuffle. To repeat the current item (
to switch repeat off, select Options > Repeat. If you play podcasts, shuffle and repeat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser. To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhance bass, select Options > Audio settings. To view a visualisation during playback, select Options > Show visualisation.
) on or off, select
), all items (
), or
. To return to the standby mode and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key, or to switch to another open application, press and hold
, and select Music > Music player >
To close the player, select Options > Exit. Music menu Press Music. The music menu shows the available music. Select the desired option in the music menu to view all songs, sorted songs, or playlists. When the Music player is playing in the background, to open the Now playing view in the multimedia menu, press the multimedia key. Playlists Press Music. To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists. To view details of the playlist, select Options >
Playlist details. Create a playlist 1. Select Options > Create playlist. 2. Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK.
, and select Music > Music player >
l r e d o f c i s u M 71 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black 3. To add songs now, select Yes; or to add the songs later, select No. 4. If you select Yes, select artists to find the songs you want to include in the playlist. Press the scroll key to add items. To show the song list under an artist title, scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 5. When you have made your selections, select Done. If a compatible memory card is inserted, the playlist is saved to the memory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add songs. To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Options > Add to a playlist > Saved playlist or New playlist. To remove a song from a playlist, select Options >
Remove. This does not delete the song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder list. To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key. l r e d o f c i s u M 72
, and select Music > Music player >
Podcasts Press Podcasts. The podcast menu displays the podcasts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states: never played, partially played, and completely played. If an episode is partially played, it plays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is never played or completely played, it plays from the beginning. Transfer music to your device You can transfer music from a compatible PC or other compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. PC requirements for music transfer:
Microsoft Windows XP operating system (or A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. You can get more detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from your device's product pages on the Nokia website. Nokia Nseries PC Suite 1.6 or later Windows Media Player 10 may cause playback delays to WMDRM technology protected files after later) Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black they have been transferred to your device. Check Microsoft support website for a hotfix to Windows Media Player 10 or get a newer compatible version of Windows Media Player. Transfer music from PC You can use three different methods to transfer music:
To view your device on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using the USB cable, select Data transfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. To synchronise music with Windows Media Player, connect the compatible USB data cable and select Media player as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in the device. To use Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite, connect the compatible USB data cable and select PC Suite as the connection mode. Use Data transfer and Media player modes to transfer files to a compatible memory card. To change the default USB connection mode, press
, and select Tools > Connectivity > USB > USB mode. Both Windows Media Player and Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been optimised to transfer music files. For information about transferring music with Nokia Music Manager, see the help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or visit the Nokia support pages. Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation functions may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and help. Manual synchronisation With manual synchronisation, you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your device in the navigation pane on the right, if more than one device is connected. 2. In the left navigation pane, browse the music files on your PC which you want to synchronise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the right. You can see the amount of available memory in your device above the Sync List. l r e d o f c i s u M 73 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To stop automatic synchronisation, click the Sync tab, and select Stop Sync to 'Nokia Handset'. Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store (network service) you can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you first need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visit www.nokia.com/music. To access the Nokia Music Store, you must have a valid internet access point in the device. To open Nokia Music Store, press Music > Music store. To find more music in different categories of the music menu, select Options > Find in Music store. For more information, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website.
, and select l r e d o f c i s u M 74 4. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the Sync List, right-click, and select Remove from list. 5. To start the synchronisation, click Start Sync. Automatic synchronisation 1. To activate the automatic synchronisation function in Windows Media Player, click the Sync tab, select Nokia Handset > Set Up Sync..., and check the Sync this device automatically check box. 2. Select the playlists you want to synchronise automatically in the Available playlists pane, and click Add. The selected items are transferred to the Playlists to sync pane. 3. To finalise the setup for automatic synchronisation, click Finish. When the Sync this device automatically check box is checked and you connect your device to the PC, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on the playlists you select for synchronisation in Windows Media Player. If no playlists have been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchronisation. If there is not enough free memory in your device, Windows Media Player selects manual synchronisation automatically. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Media folder For information on Flash Player, Nokia Lifeblog, and Recorder, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play video clips or stream media files over the air without saving them to the device first. RealPlayer supports files with extensions such as . 3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support all file formats or all the variations of file formats. For more information on RealPlayer, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Play video clips Press RealPlayer. 1. To play a saved media file, select Options >
, and select Applications > Media >
Open and from the following:
Most recent clips Play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer. Saved clip Play a file saved in Gallery. 2. Scroll to a file, and press the scroll key to play the file. To adjust the volume, use the volume key. Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer plays a .ram file if you open an http link to it in a browser. To stream content over the air (network service), select a streaming link saved in Gallery, on a web page, or received in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your device connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. l r e d o f a i d e M 75 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black l r e d o f a i d e M 76
, and Activation keys To view digital rights activation keys, press select Applications > Media > Actv. keys. Digital rights management Content owners may use different types of digital rights management (DRM) technologies to protect their intellectual property, including copyrights. This device uses various types of DRM software to access DRM-protected content. With this device you can access content protected with WMDRM 10, OMA DRM 1.0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If certain DRM software fails to protect the content, content owners may ask that such DRM software's ability to access new DRM-
protected content be revoked. Revocation may also prevent renewal of such DRM-protected content already in your device. Revocation of such DRM software does not affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-
DRM-protected content. Digital rights management (DRM) protected content comes with an associated activation key that defines your rights to use the content. If your device has OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activation keys and the content, use the backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the activation keys which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the activation keys in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM protected content, both the activation keys and the content will be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and the content in case the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activation keys or the content may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. In the main view, select from the following:
Valid keys View keys that are connected to media files or whose validity period has not begun. Invalid keys View keys that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a protected media file in the device but no connected activation key. Not in use View keys that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time for a media file, select an invalid activation key and Options > Get new key (web service messages must be enabled). Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Personalise your device You can personalise your device by changing the standby mode, main menu, tones, themes, or font size. Most of the personalisation options, such as changing the font size, can be accessed through the device settings. See "Personalisation settings," p. 99. For information on 3-D tones, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Themes Press
, and select Tools > Settings >
General > Personalisation > Themes. You can change the look of the display, such as the wallpaper and icons. To change the theme that is used for all the applications in your device, select General. To preview a theme before activating it, select Options > Preview. To activate the theme, select Options > Set. The active theme is indicated by
. To change the layout of the main menu, select Menu view. Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. To edit the wallpaper and power saver of the current theme that appear in the standby mode, select Wallpaper to change the background image or Power saver to change the power saver. Profilesset tones Press You can set and customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other tones for different events, environments, or caller groups. To change the profile, select a profile, and Options > Activate. To also change the profile, press the power key in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK.
, and select Tools > Profiles. Tip: To switch between the general and silent profiles in the standby mode, press and hold
#. e c i v e d r u o y e s i l a n o s r e P 77 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To modify a profile, scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise. If you want the callers name to be spoken when your device rings, select Options > Personalise, and set Say caller's name to On. The callers name must be saved in Contacts. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new. Modify the standby mode To switch the active standby on or off, press select Tools > Settings > General >
Personalisation > Standby mode > Active standby. The active standby display shows application shortcuts, and events from applications such as calendar and player. To change the selection key shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the active standby mode, select Tools > Settings >
General >
Personalisation >
Standby mode. Some
, and e c i v e d r u o y e s i l a n o s r e P 78
, and select Applications > Clock >
shortcuts may be fixed, and you cannot change them. To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press Options > Settings > Clock type. You can also change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver. See
"Themes," p. 77. Modify the main menu To change the main menu view, in the main menu, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid or List. To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move, Move to folder, or New folder. You can move less used applications into folders and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. To use animated icons in your device, in the main menu, select Options > Icon animation > On. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Messaging Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. For more information on messaging, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Messaging main view Press
, and select Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message. Messaging contains the following folders:
Inbox Received messages, except e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. My folders Organise your messages into folders. Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use texts in the Templates folder in My folders. You can also create and save your own templates. Mailbox Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e-mail messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. Drafts Draft messages that have not been sent are stored here. Sent The last messages that have been sent, excluding messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity, are stored here. You can change the number of messages to save in this folder. Outbox Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in the outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. Reports You can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent
(network service). Write and send messages Press Before you can create a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See "Define the e-mail settings," p. 82.
, and select Messaging. g n i g a s s e M 79 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 1. Select New message > Text message to send a text message, Multimedia message to send a multimedia message (MMS), Audio message to send an audio message (a multimedia message that includes one sound clip), or E-mail to send an e-mail. 2. In the To field, press the scroll key to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipients phone number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon (;) that separates the recipients, press *. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. 3. In the Subject field, enter the subject of the multimedia message or e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fields. g n i g a s s e M 80 4. In the message field, write the message. To insert a template, select Options > Insert or Insert object > Template. 5. To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image, Sound clip, or Video clip. 6. To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Insert new >
Image, Sound clip, or Video clip. To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide. To see what the multimedia message looks like, select Options > Preview. 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image, Sound clip, Video clip, Note, or Other for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by 8. To send the message, select Options > Send,
. or press the call key. Note: Your device may indicate that your message was sent to the message center number programmed into your device. Your device may not indicate whether the message is received at the intended destination. For more details about messaging services, contact your service provider. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Longer messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge accordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. You may not be able to send video clips that are saved in the .mp4 format or that exceed the size limit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Messaging inbox Receive messages Press In the Inbox folder, message, unread audio message, and through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, message are shown in the standby mode. To open the message, select Show. To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To reply to a received message, select Options > Reply. an unread multimedia message, data received
, and select Messaging > Inbox. indicates an unread text and 1 new an Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that a multimedia message is waiting in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options >
Retrieve. When you open a multimedia message (
may see an image and a message. sound is included, or the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects that have been included in the multimedia message, select Options >
Objects. If the message includes a multimedia presentation, is displayed. To play the presentation, select the indicator.
), you is shown if if video is included. To play g n i g a s s e M 81 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black g n i g a s s e M 82 Mailbox Define the e-mail settings Tip: Use Settings wizard to define your mailbox settings. Press Utilities > Sett. wizard.
, and select Tools >
To use e-mail, you must have a valid internet access point (IAP) in the device and define your e-mail settings correctly. See "Access points," p. 105. See
"E-mail settings," p. 85. You must have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provider (ISP). If you select Mailbox in the Messaging main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox guide, select Start. When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox Press When you open the mailbox, the device asks if you want to connect to the mailbox (Connect to mailbox?).
, and select Messaging and a mailbox. To connect to your mailbox and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes. When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline, select No. To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the Messaging main view or Options > Create message > E-mail in your mailbox. See "Write and send messages," p. 79. Retrieve e-mail messages Press If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to the remote mailbox.
, and select Messaging and a mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail >
New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrieve only the messages that have been marked, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black 2. To close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline, select Options >
Disconnect. 3. To open an e-mail message, press the scroll key. If the e-mail message has not been retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. If the To view e-mail attachments, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; select Options >
Retrieve. To retrieve e-mail messages automatically, select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic retrieval. See "Automatic retrieval settings," p. 87. Setting the device to retrieve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages Press To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the device while still retaining it in the remote
, and select Messaging and a mailbox. mailbox, select Options > Delete. In Delete message from:, select Phone only. The device mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, then make a connection from your device to the remote mailbox again to update the status. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete > Phone and server. To cancel deleting an e-mail from the device and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connection select Options > Restore. Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, to end the data connection to the remote mailbox, select Options >
Disconnect. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigured in your device, or you may receive them in a message. To enter settings manually, fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or an asterisk.
, and g n i g a s s e M 83 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black g n i g a s s e M 84
, and select Messaging > Options >
Some or all message centres or access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. Text message settings Press Settings > Text message. Select from the following:
Message centres View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. Message centre in use Select which message centre to use to deliver text messages. Character encoding To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support. Receive report Select whether the network sends delivery reports on your messages
(network service). Message validity Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. Message sent as Contact your service provider to learn if your message centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Preferred connection Select the connection to use. Reply via same centre Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (network service). Multimedia message settings Press
, and select Messaging > Options >
Settings > Multimedia message. Select from the following:
Image size Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. MMS creation mode If you select Guided, the device informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted, the device prevents you from sending messages that may not be supported. To include content in your messages without notifications, select Free. Access point in use Select which access point is used as the preferred connection. Multimedia retrieval Select how you want to receive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellular network, select Auto in home netw.. Outside your home cellular network, you receive a notification that there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia message centre. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Outside your home cellular network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic, your device automatically makes an active packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home cellular network. Allow anon. msgs. Select whether you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. Receive adverts Define whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report Select whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log
(network service). want to deny your device sending delivery reports of received messages. Message validity Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. E-mail settings Manage mailboxes Press Settings > E-mail. Deny report sending Select whether you
, and select Messaging > Options >
To select which mailbox you want to use to send e-
mail, select Mailbox in use and a mailbox. To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes, scroll to the desired mailbox, and press C. To create a new mailbox, in Mailboxes, select Options > New mailbox. The name you give to the new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to change the connection settings, user settings, retrieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Connection settings Press Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes, a mailbox, and Connection settings. To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail, and from the following:
User name Enter your user name given to you Password Enter your password. If you leave by your service provider. this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail.
, and select Messaging > Options >
g n i g a s s e M 85 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black point (IAP). See "Access points," p. 105. Access point in use Select an internet access Mailbox name Enter a name for the mailbox. Mailbox type Defines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provider recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4. This setting cannot be changed. Security (ports) Select the security option used to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. Port Define a port for the connection. APOP secure login (for POP3 only) Use with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. To edit the settings for the e-mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail and from the following:
My e-mail address Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Outgoing mail server Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-
mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. The settings for User name, Password, Access point in use, Security (ports), and Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e-mail. g n i g a s s e M 86
, and select Messaging > Options >
User settings Press Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes, a mailbox, and User settings. Select from the following:
My name Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipients device when the recipients device supports this function. Send message Define how e-mail is sent from your device. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message. If you select During next conn., e-
mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. Send copy to self Select whether you want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. Include signature Select whether you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. New e-mail alerts Select whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received.
, and select Messaging > Options >
Retrieval settings Press Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes, a mailbox, and Retrieval settings. Select from the following:
Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black E-mail to retrieve Define which parts of the e-mail are retrieved: Headers only, Size limit
(POP3), or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). Retrieval amount Define how many new e-
mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. IMAP4 folder path (for IMAP4 only) Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. Folder subscriptions (for IMAP4 only) Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox, and retrieve content from those folders.
, and select Messaging > Options >
Automatic retrieval settings Press Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes, a mailbox, and Automatic retrieval. Select from the following:
E-mail notifications To automatically retrieve the headings to your device when you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto-update or Only in home netw.. headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enabled or Only in home netw.. Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail retrieval To automatically retrieve the E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at the same time. Setting the device to retrieve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Other settings Press Settings > Other. Select from the following:
Save sent messages Select whether you
, and select Messaging > Options >
want to save a copy of the text messages, multimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Sent folder. Number of saved msgs. Define how many sent messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reached, the oldest message is deleted. want to save your messages. Memory in use Select the memory where you g n i g a s s e M 87 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s l l a c e k a M 88 Make calls For information on conference calls, speed dialling, voice dialling, call waiting, and options during calls, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Video sharing is also explained in the extended user guide. Voice calls 1. In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C. For international calls, press * twice for the +
character (replaces the international access code), and enter the country code, area code
(omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2. Press the call key to call the number. 3. Press the end key to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing the end key always ends a call, even if another application is active.
, and select To make a call from Contacts, press Contacts. Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. Matching contacts are listed. To call, press the call key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or video mailbox (network services, video mailbox available only in the UMTS network), press and hold 1 in the standby mode, and select Voice mailbox or Video mailbox. To change the phone number of your voice or video
, and select Tools > Utilities >
mailbox, press Call mailbox, a mailbox, and Options > Change number. Enter the number (obtained from your network service provider), and select OK. Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, select Silence. If you do not want to answer a call, press the end key. If you activate the Call divert > Voice calls >
Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black If busy function in phone settings to forward calls, declining an incoming call also forwards the call. When you select Silence to mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call, informing the caller that you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message. To set up this option and write a standard text message, select Tools > Settings >
Phone > Call > Reject call with SMS. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile device or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while another voice, video, or data call is active. Icons You are not receiving video (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, select Tools >
Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call. Even if you denied video sending during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video call, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts and a contact. 2. Select Options > Call > Video call. The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the loudspeaker. The call recipient may deny video
), in which case you only hear the sending (
sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. 3. To end the video call, press the end key. s l l a c e k a M 89 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black is displayed. Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, To answer the video call, press the call key. Allow video image to be sent to caller? is displayed. To start sending live video image, select Yes. If you do not activate the video call, video sending is not activated, and you only hear the sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces the video image. To replace the grey screen with a still image captured by the camera in your device, select Tools >
Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call. To end the video call, press the end key. Internet calls With the internet call service (network service), you can make and receive calls over the internet. Internet calls can be established between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To make or receive an internet call, your device must be connected to an internet call service. s l l a c e k a M 90 To connect to an internet call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection network, such as a WLAN access point. Your device supports voice calls over the internet
(net calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts an emergency call through your net call provider. Due to the established nature of cellular telephony, you should use cellular networks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have cellular network coverage available, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attempt an emergency call. The capability for an emergency call using internet telephony depends on the availability of a WLAN network and your net call provider's implementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your net call provider to check the internet telephony emergency call capability. Create an internet call profile Before you can make internet calls, you must create an internet call profile. 1. Press
, select Tools > Settings >
Connection > SIP settings > Options > New SIP profile, and enter the required information. Ensure that Registration is set to Always on. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Auto. Contact your internet call provider for the correct settings. 2. Select Proxy server > Transport type >
3. Select Back until you return to the main view of connection settings. 4. Select Internet tel. > Options > New profile. Enter a name for the profile, and select the SIP profile you just created. To use the created profile for connecting to the
, and internet call service automatically, press select Tools > Connectivity > Internet tel. >
Preferred profile. To log in to the internet call service manually, select Registration > When needed, and Transport type > UDP or TCP in the SIP settings when creating an internet call profile. Connect to the internet call service To make or receive an internet call, your device must be connected to an internet call service. If you have selected automatic login, your device automatically connects to the internet call service. If you log in to the service manually, select an available network from the list and Select. When you are connected to an internet call service, is shown in the standby mode. The list of networks is refreshed automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh the list manually, select Options > Refresh. Use this option if your WLAN access point is not shown. To select an internet call service for outgoing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Options > Change service. To configure new services, select Options >
Configure service. This option is shown only if there are services that have not been configured. To save the network to which you are currently connected, select Options > Save network. The saved networks are marked with a star in the list of networks. To connect to an internet call service using a hidden WLAN, select Options > Use hidden network. To end the connection to an internet call service, select Options > Disconnect from serv.. Make internet calls When you have activated the internet call feature, you can make an internet call from all applications where you can make a regular voice call. For example, in Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and select Call > Options > Internet call. s l l a c e k a M 91 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To make an internet call in the standby mode, enter the phone number or internet address, and press the call key. To make an internet call to an address that does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch the device from the number mode to the letter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key.
, To make an internet call from Contacts, press select Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and select Options > Internet call.
, To make an internet call from the log, press select Tools > Log and the log type, scroll to the desired contact, and select Options > Internet call. Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. For more information on Log, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. s l l a c e k a M 92
, and select Tools > Log. Recent calls Press To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialled voice calls, select Recent calls. The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main view. To clear one of the call registers, open the register you want to erase, and select Options > Clear list. To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press C. Call duration Press To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, select Call duration. Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options >
Clear timers. For this you need the lock code.
, and select Tools > Log. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Contacts (phonebook) In Contacts, you can save and update contact information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can also create contact groups, which allow you to send text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. For more information on Contacts and SIM contacts, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Save and edit names and numbers 1. Press New contact.
, and select Contacts > Options >
2. Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done. To edit contact cards, scroll to the contact card you want to edit, and select Options > Edit. You can also search for the desired contact by entering the first letters of the name to the search field. A list of the contacts starting with the letters appear on the display. Tip: To add and edit contact cards, you can also use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia Nseries PC Suite. To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open the contact card, and select Options > Edit >
Options > Add thumbnail. The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Add ringing tones for contacts Press To define a ringing tone for a contact or a contact group, do the following:
1. Press the scroll key to open a contact card or go
, and select Contacts. to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2. Select Options > Ringing tone. A list of ringing tones opens. 3. Select the ringing tone you want to use for the individual contact or the members of the selected group. When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callers
) k o o b e n o h p
s t c a t n o C 93 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
) k o o b e n o h p
s t c a t n o C telephone number is sent with the call and your device recognises it). To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Copy contacts To copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device, press
, and select Contacts > Options >
SIM contacts > SIM directory, the names you want to copy, and Options > Copy to Contacts. To copy contacts to your SIM card, in Contacts, select the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to SIM directory, or Options > Copy > To SIM directory. Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. 94 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Applications folder Calculator Press
, and select Applications > Calculator. Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, enter the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the second number of the calculation, and select =. Application manager With Application manager, you can see the software packages installed in your device. You can view details of installed applications, remove applications, and define installation settings. Press You can install two types of applications and software to your device:
J2ME applications based on Java technology with
, and select Applications > App. mgr.. the extension .jad or .jar Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system with the extension .sis or .sisx Only install software specifically designed for your device: Nokia N82. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product:
Nokia N82-1. For application manager settings, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Install applications and software Installation files may be transferred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachment or using other connectivity methods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Nseries PC Suite to install an application to your device. If you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, save the file to a compatible memory card (local disk). indicates a .sis or .sisx application, a Java that the application is not fully application, l r e d o f s n o i t a c i l p p A 95 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black l r e d o f s n o i t a c i l p p A 96 installed, and the memory card. that the application is installed on Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted sources, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java VerifiedTM testing. Before installation, note the following:
To view the application type, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details. To display the security certificate details of the application, in Details:, scroll to Certificates, and select View details. See "Certificate management," p. 102. If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you have the original installation file or a full backup copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup copy. The .jar file is required for installing Java applications. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. To install an application or software, do the following:
1. To locate an installation file, press
, and select Applications > App. mgr.. Alternatively, search the device memory or a compatible memory card (if inserted) in File manager, or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installation file. 2. In Application manager, select Options >
Install. In other applications, scroll to the installation file, and select it to start the installation. You cannot cancel the installation after you have started it. During installation, the device shows information about the progress of the installation. If you install an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warning. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed application, locate it in the menu, and select it. If the application does not have Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applications folder in the main menu. To see which software packages are installed or removed and when, select Options > View log. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a compatible PC, then use the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment, delete the message from the Messaging inbox. See "File manager," p. 98. Remove applications and software Press Scroll to a software package, and select Options >
Remove. Select Yes to confirm.
, and select Applications > App. mgr.. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software package or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. l r e d o f s n o i t a c i l p p A 97 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Tools folder For information on Voice commands, Device manager, and synchronisation, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. File manager To browse files and folders in the memory, press
, and select Tools > File mgr..
), if available. When you open File manager, the device memory view (
) opens. Scroll right to open the memory card view (
To see how much memory different data types use, select Options > Memory details. To find a file, select Options > Find and the memory from which to search. Enter a search text that matches the file name. To mark files, select Options > Mark/Unmark >
Mark or Mark all. To move or copy the files, select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder. l r e d o f s l o o T 98
, and select Tools > Utilities >
Memory card tool A compatible memory card may already be inserted in your device. Press Memory. To see how much memory different data types use, select Options > Memory details. To back up information from the device memory to a compatible memory card, select Options > Back up phone memory. The device notifies you if there is not enough free space to create a backup. To restore information from the compatible memory card to the device memory, select Options > Restore from card. When a memory card is reformatted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplied preformatted and others require formatting; consult your retailer. The memory card supplied with your device does not need to be formatted. To format a memory card, select Options >
Format memory card and Yes to confirm. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Settings Some settings may be preset for the device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change them. For information on application settings, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. General settings In general settings, you can edit the general settings of your device or restore the device to original default settings. You can adjust time and date settings also in the clock. Personalisation settings Press General > Personalisation. You can edit settings related to the display, standby mode, and general functions of your device. Themes allows you to change the look of the display. See "Themes," p. 77.
, and select Tools > Settings >
Voice comms. opens the settings for the Voice commands application. Tones allows you to change the tones of the calendar, clock, and currently active profile. Display Light sensor Scroll left or right to adjust the light sensor that observes the lighting conditions and adjusts the brightness of the display. The light sensor may cause the display to flicker in low light. Font size Adjust the size of the text and icons on the display. Power saver time-out Select the time-out period after which the power saver is activated. Welcome note / logo The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the device. Light time-out Select a time-out after which the backlight of the display is switched off. Rotate screen Change the setting for automatic display rotation. In most applications, the display rotates automatically between portrait and landscape modes based on the orientation of the device. To ensure that the automatic display rotation works, hold the s g n i t t e S 99 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s g n i t t e S 100 device in an upright position. Automatic rotation is not functioning, if you change the display rotation setting manually in an application. When you exit the application, automatic rotation is activated again. Standby mode Active standby Activate shortcuts to Shortcuts Assign a shortcut to the selection applications in the standby mode. keys in the standby mode. If the active standby is set off, you can also assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key. Active standby apps. If the active standby is set on, select the application shortcuts you want to appear in the active standby. Operator logo This setting is only available if you have received and saved an operator logo. Select Off if you do not want the logo to be shown. Language Changing the settings for the phone language or writing language affects every application in your device, and the change remains effective until you change these settings again. Phone language Change the language of the display text in your device. This also affects the format used for date and time and the separators used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the device restarts. Writing language Change the writing language. This affects the characters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Predictive text Set predictive text input on or off for all editors in the device. The predictive text dictionary is not available for all languages. Enhancement settings Press General > Enhancement. Some enhancement connectors indicate which type of enhancement is connected to the device. See
"Display indicators," p. 17. The available settings depend on the type of enhancement. Select an enhancement and from the following:
Default profile Set the profile that you want
, and select Tools > Settings >
activated each time you connect a certain compatible enhancement to your device. Automatic answer Select whether you want the device to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the ringing type Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black is set to Beep once or Silent, automatic answer is disabled. Lights Set whether lights remain on or are switched off after the time-out. This setting is not available for all enhancements. TV-out settings To change the settings for a TV-out connection, select TV-Out and from the following:
Default profile Set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a Nokia Video Connectivity Cable to your device. TV screen size Select the aspect ratio of the TV: Normal or Widescreen for widescreen TVs. TV system Select the analogue video signal system that is compatible with your TV. Flicker filter To improve image quality on the screen of your TV, select On. The flicker filter may not diminish image flicker on all TV screens. Security settings For security module settings, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Phone and SIM Press General > Security > Phone and SIM card.
, and select Tools > Settings >
PIN code request When active, the code is requested each time the device is switched on. Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. PIN code, PIN2 code, and Lock code You can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9. If you forget the PIN or the PIN2 code, contact your service provider. If you forget the lock code, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider.See "Access codes," p. 13. Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. Keypad autolock period Select whether the keypad is locked when your device has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip: To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press the left selection key, then *. Phone autolock period To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a time-out after which the device automatically locks. A locked device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the autolock period, select None. s g n i t t e S 101 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s g n i t t e S Tip: To lock the device manually, press the power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone. Lock if SIM card changed You can set the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your device. The device maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the owners cards. Closed user group You can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you (network service). Confirm SIM services You can set the device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service).
, and select Tools > Settings >
Certificate management Press General > Security > Certificate management. Digital certificates do not guarantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority certificates that are stored in your device. Scroll right to see a list of personal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferring confidential information. They should also be used if you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other 102 malicious software and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or
"Certificate not valid yet" is shown even if the certificate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. Before changing any certificate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner. For more information, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Restore original settings Press General > Factory settings. You can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code.
, and select Tools > Settings >
Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
, and select Tools > Settings >
After resetting, the device may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Positioning settings Press General > Positioning. Positioning methods Integrated GPS Use the integrated GPS Assisted GPS Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS). Bluetooth GPS Use a compatible external GPS Network based Use information from the receiver with Bluetooth connectivity. cellular network (network service). receiver of your device. Positioning server To define an access point, and positioning server for A-GPS, select Positioning server. The positioning server may be preset by your service provider, and you may not be able to edit the settings. Phone settings In phone settings, you can edit settings related to phone calls and network. For information on call barring, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website.
, and select Tools > Settings > Phone >
Call settings Press Call. Send my caller ID You can set your phone number to be displayed to (Yes) or hidden from
(No) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your service provider when you make a subscription (Set by network)
(network service). Call waiting If you have activated call waiting
(network service), the network notifies you of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress. Set the function on (Activate) or off
(Cancel), or check whether the function is activated (Check status). notified of a new incoming internet call while you have a call in progress. Internet call alert Select On to be alerted for incoming internet calls. If you select Off, you are not alerted, but a notification about missed calls appears. Default call type To set internet calls as the default call type when making calls, select Internet call. If an internet call service is not available, a regular voice call is started instead. Reject call with SMS To send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the call, select Yes. Internet call waiting Select Activated to be s g n i t t e S 103 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s g n i t t e S 104 Message text Write a text to be sent in a text Image in video call If video is not sent during message when you reject a call. a video call, you can select a still image to be displayed instead. Automatic redial Select On, and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialling, press the end key. Show call duration Activate this setting if you want the length of a call to be displayed during the call. Speed dial Select On, and the numbers assigned to the number keys (2 to 9) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. Anykey answer Select On, and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, except the left and right selection keys, the power key, and the end key. Line in use This setting (network service) is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you are not is able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, shown in the standby mode. Tip: To switch between the phone lines, press and hold # in the standby mode. Line change To prevent line selection
, and select Tools > Settings > Phone >
(network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Call divert Press Call divert. Call divert allows you to divert your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. Select which calls you want to divert and the desired diverting option. Set the option on (Activate) or off
(Cancel), or check whether the option is activated
(Check status). Several diverting options can be active at the same is shown in time. When all calls are diverted, the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Network settings Press Network.
, and select Tools > Settings > Phone >
Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
. Your device can automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with Network mode Select which network to use. If you select Dual mode, the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements between the wireless service providers. Contact your network service provider for details and roaming costs. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. Operator selection Select Automatic to set the device to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the device sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more service providers to enable the users of one service provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info display Select On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Connection settings In connection settings, you can edit access points and other connectivity settings. You can also edit settings for Bluetooth connectivity in the Bluetooth connectivity application. See
"Settings," p. 63. You can also edit settings for data cable connections in the USB application. See "USB," p. 65. For more information on connection settings, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Access points Create a new access point Press Connection > Access points. You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them.
, and select Tools > Settings >
indicates a protected access point. indicates a packet data access point. s g n i t t e S 105 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black s g n i t t e S 106 indicates a WLAN access point. Tip: You can create internet access points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. for the connection. To create a new access point, select Options >
New access point. To edit the settings of an access point, select Options > Edit. Follow the instructions from your service provider. Connection name Enter a descriptive name Data bearer Select the data connection type. Depending on the data connection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Packet data access points Press Connection > Access points > Options > Edit or New access point. Follow the instructions from your service provider.
, and select Tools > Settings >
Access point name You obtain the access point name from your service provider. User name The user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually provided by the service provider. Prompt password If you must enter the password every time you log in to a server, or if you do not want to save your password in the device, select Yes. Password A password may be needed to make a data connection and is usually provided by the service provider. Authentication Select Secure to always send your password encrypted or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. Homepage Depending on the access point you are setting up, enter the web address or the address of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings:
Network type Select the internet protocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPV4 only) Enter the IP address of your device. DNS address Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black by your service provider. Contact your internet service provider to obtain these addresses. Proxy server address Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy port number Enter the port number of the proxy server.
, and select Tools > Settings >
WLAN internet access points Press Connection > Access points > Options > Edit or New access point. Follow the instructions from the WLAN service provider. WLAN network name Select Enter manually or Search for networks. If you select an existing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the settings of its access point device. Network status Define whether the network name is displayed. WLAN network mode Select Ad-hoc to create an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc network, all devices must use the same WLAN network name. WLAN security mode Select the encryption used: WEP, 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/WPA2. If you select Open network, no encryption is used. The WEP, 802.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them.
, and select Tools > Settings >
To enter the settings for the selected security mode, select WLAN security settings. For more information, see the extended user guide on the product support pages of the Nokia website. Packet data settings Press Connection > Packet data. The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data connection If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the device registers to the packet data network. Starting an active packet data connection (for example, to send and receive e-
mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data coverage, the device periodically tries to establish a packet data connection. If you select When needed, the device uses a packet data connection only if you start an application or action that needs it. Access point The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. s g n i t t e S 107 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black High speed packet access Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network service) in UMTS networks. Wireless LAN settings Press Connection > Wireless LAN. Show WLAN availability Select whether
, and select Tools > Settings >
is displayed in the standby mode when a wireless LAN is available. Scan for networks If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes, select how often the device searches for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view advanced settings, select Options >
Advanced settings. Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommended. Internet call settings Press Connection > Internet tel.. To create a new internet call profile, select Options > New profile. To edit an existing profile, select Options > Edit.
, and select Tools > Settings >
s g n i t t e S 108 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-
circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-
circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15C and 25C (59F and 77F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. n o i t a m r o f n i y r e t t a B 109 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Do not dismantle or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with water, or seek medical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia dealer, and inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it, and take it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. Your authorised Nokia service point or dealer will inspect the battery for authenticity. If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase. n o i t a m r o f n i y r e t t a B 110 Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authentic?
If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. Take it to the nearest authorised Nokia service point or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may also invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the device. Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit www.nokia.com/battery. n o i t a m r o f n i y r e t t a B 111 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black e c n a n e t n i a m d n a e r a C 112 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will help you protect your warranty coverage. Keep the device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temperature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. Do not attempt to open the device other than as instructed in this guide. Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. Use chargers indoors. Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. To reset the device from time to time for optimum performance, power off the device and remove the battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service. Disposal The crossed-out wheeled-bin symbol on your product, literature, or packaging reminds you that in the European Union all electrical and electronic products, batteries, and accumulators must be taken to separate collection at the end of their working life. Do not dispose of these products as unsorted municipal waste. Return the products to collection to prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal and to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Collection information is available from the product retailer, local waste authorities, national producer responsibility organizations, or your local Nokia representative. For more information, see product Eco-Declaration or country-specific information at www.nokia.com. e c n a n e t n i a m d n a e r a C 113 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black n o i t a m r o f n i y t e f a s l a n o i t i d d A 114 Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 centimeters (5/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the device the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) should be maintained between a wireless device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential interference with the medical device. Persons who have such devices should:
Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimeters (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device to minimize the potential for interference. Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questions about using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-
vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. n o i t a m r o f n i y t e f a s l a n o i t i d d A 115 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) to determine if this device can be safely used in their vicinity. n o i t a m r o f n i y t e f a s l a n o i t i d d A 116 Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-
programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call:
1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4. Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. If the device is in the offline or flight profile mode, you may need to change the profile to activate the phone function before you can make Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information
(SAR) This mobile device meets guidelines for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the device is designed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidelines for use of the device at the ear is x.xx W/
kg. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. Your mobile device is also designed to meet the requirements for exposure to radio waves established by the Federal Communications Commission (USA) and Industry Canada. These requirements set a SAR limit of 1.6 W/kg averaged over one gram of tissue. The highest SAR value reported under this standard during product certification for use at the ear is 0.78 W/kg and when properly worn on the body is 0.87 W/kg. Information about this device model can be found at www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid by searching the equipment authorization system using FCC ID:
QVVRM-313. n o i t a m r o f n i y t e f a s l a n o i t i d d A 117 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black x e d n I 118 Index A access codes 13 access points 61, 105 accessories See enhancements activation keys 76 active standby mode 78, 100 active toolbar in camera 24 in gallery 35 address book See contacts albums, media 36 answering calls 88 application manager 95 applications 95 attachments 81, 83 audio messages 79 B backlight time-out 99 battery power saver setting 99 saving power 14 blogs 56 Bluetooth connectivity device address 64 device visibility 63 pairing devices 64 receiving data 65 security 64 sending data 64 settings 63 switching on/off 63 bookmarks 57 brightness, display 99 browser bookmarks 57 browsing pages 55, 56 cache memory 57 security 58 settings 58 C cable connection 65 cache memory 57 calculator 95 calls 88 answering 88 duration of 92 internet calls 91 rejecting 88 camera settings 103 colour 32 flash 26 image quality 31 imaging mode 25 lighting 32 scenes 27 self-timer 28 sequence mode 27 settings 31 video mode 30 video quality 33 certificates 102 clock 78 computer connections 66 connection manager 62 contacts See also data connections copying 94 editing 93 images in 93 ringing tones 93 saving 93 copyright protection 76 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black D data connections cable 65 PC connectivity 66 declining calls 88 dialled numbers 92 dismissing calls 88 display settings 99 DRM (digital rights management) 76 duration of calls 92 E e-mail messages 82 enhancements settings 100 F factory settings, restoring 102 feeds, news 56 font settings 99 formatting memory cards 98 G gallery 34 general information 12 GPS (Global Positioning System) 45 grid view of menus 78 H headset 21 help application 12 home network 41 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 18 I IAPs (internet access points) 61 images editing 37 printing 39, 40 sharing online 40 inbox, message 81 indicators and icons 17 installation of applications 95 internet calls 90 connecting 91 making 91 profiles 90, 108 settings 108 See also browser internet connection 55 J J2ME Java application support 95 Java scripts/applications 95 K keyguard 101 keypad 101 L landmarks 52 language settings 100 light settings 99 list view of menus 78 location information 45 lock code 13 locking keypad 101 loudspeaker 21 M mailbox e-mail 82 video 88 voice 88 main menu 78 Maps 47 media music player 70 RealPlayer 75 streaming 75 clearing 15 web cache 57 memory x e d n I 119 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black x e d n I 120 messages e-mail 82 folders for 79 icon for incoming 81 multimedia 81 settings 83 voice 88 Mini Map 56 MMS (multimedia message service) 79, 81 multimedia menu 19 multimedia messages 79, 81 music player 70 muting sound 88 my numbers 93 N navigation tools 45 network settings 104 news feeds 56 O offline mode 21 operator logo 100 outbox, message 79 P packet data connection access point settings 106 settings 107 See contacts See camera page overview 56 personal certificates 102 personalisation 77, 99 phonebook photographs PictBridge 39 PIN code 13 PIN2 code 13 positioning information 45 positioning settings 103 power saver 99 presentations, multimedia 39, 81 printing profiles images 39 internet call profile 90, 108 offline restrictions 21 proxy settings 107 PUK codes 13 R RealPlayer 75 recording video clips 30 redial feature 104 rejecting calls 88 remote mailbox 82 ringing tones 77 roaming 104 S scenes, image and video 27 screen settings 99 security certificates 102 web browser 58 security code 13 self-timer, camera 28 sent messages folder 79 setting wizard 16 settings access points 105 Bluetooth connectivity 63 call divert 104 calls 103 camera 31 certificates 102 display 99 enhancements 100 home network 42 internet call 108 language 100 network 104 packet data 107 packet data access points 106 personalisation 99 positioning 103 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black shortcuts 100 standby 100 tv-out 101 Video Centre 69 web browser 58 WLAN 108 WLAN internet access points 107 shooting modes, camera 27 shortcuts 100 SIM card security 101 slide show 36 SMS (short message service) 79 software applications 95 software update 12 songs 70 speaker phone 21 standby mode 78, 100 streaming media 75 Symbian applications 95 T templates, message 80 text messages receiving and reading 81 replying to 81 sending 79 settings 84 themes 77 time-out for backlight 99 tones ring settings 77 settings 99 toolbar 24, 35 transferring data 16 transferring music 72 TV configuration 101 tv-out mode 38 U unlocking keypad 101 UPIN code 13 UPnP (Universal Plug and Play architecture) 41 UPUK code 13 USB cable connection 65 V video calls 89, 90 voice calls voice over IP (VOIP) 90 volume controls 21 W wallpaper 77 web connection 55 web logs 56 welcome 16 See calls welcome note 99 wireless LAN (WLAN) 60 wireless LAN settings 108 Z zooming 25, 30 x e d n I 121 Cyan Cyan Magenta Cyan Cyan Magenta MagentaYellow MagentaYellow Yellow Black Yellow Black Black Black
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2008-06-09 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||
3 | 2007-11-27 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | Original Equipment |
4 | 2007-11-20 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | ||
5 | 2412 ~ 2462 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||
6 | 2007-11-16 | 1850.2 ~ 1909.8 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Effective |
2008-06-09
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2007-11-27
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2007-11-20
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
2007-11-16
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Microsoft Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0008374555
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
1 Microsoft Way
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Redmond, Washington 98052
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Application Email Address |
h******@americantcb.com
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
h******@atcb.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
B1: Commercial mobile radio services equipment in the following 47 CFR Parts 20, 22 (cellular), 24,25 (below 3 GHz) & 27
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grantee Code |
QVV
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Product Code |
RM-313
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
H******** S********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Title |
Director, EMC, SI and RF Compliance
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
425-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
425-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
h******@microsoft.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
Nokia (China) Investment Co., Ltd
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
Y******** W********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Physical Address |
Nokia Tower, Pacific Century Place 2A
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Nokia Tower 11F, Pacific Century Place 2A
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
Beijing, 100027
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
China
|
|||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
01186******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
01186********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
y******@nokia.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Yes | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 01/11/2008 | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 11/29/2007 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 01/04/2008 | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | 12/31/2007 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | GSM/WCDMA Cellular phone w/BT and WLAN | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Grant Comments | Output power is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. This device contains 900 / 1800 MHz and WCDMA Band I functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. Collocated transmitter operating configurations have been evaluated as described in this filing; other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific configurations tested for this filing; body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 2.2 cm separation between the device and the user's body. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values for single- and co-transmit configurations under this FCC ID are: Part 15 - head 0.28 W/kg; body-worn 0.09 W/kg; Part 22 - head 1.16 W/kg; body-worn 1.20 W/kg; Part 24 - head 0.79 W/kg; body-worn 0.37 W/kg; co-transmitting - head 1.30 W/kg; body-worn 1.27 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Output power is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. This device contains 900 / 1800 MHz and WCDMA Band I functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. Collocated transmitter operating configurations have been evaluated as described in this filing; other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific configurations tested for this filing; body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 2.2 cm separation between the device and the user's body. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values for single- and co-transmit configurations under this FCC ID are: Part 15 - head 0.28 W/kg; body-worn 0.09 W/kg; Part 22 - head 1.16 W/kg; body-worn 1.20 W/kg; Part 24 - head 0.79 W/kg; body-worn 0.37 W/kg; co-transmitting - head 1.30 W/kg; body-worn 1.27 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Output power is conducted. The antenna used for this transmitter is installed for use in a final-product with other licensed and unlicensed transceivers under this FCC ID. End-users must be provided with transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Output power is conducted. Collocated transmitter operating configurations have been evaluated as described in this filing; other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific configurations tested for this filing; body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the user's body. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values for single- and co-transmit configurations under this FCC ID are: Part 15 - head 0.28 W/kg; body-worn 0.09 W/kg; Part 22 - head 0.54 W/kg; body-worn 0.78 W/kg; Part 24 - head 0.29 W/kg; body-worn 0.29 W/kg; co-transmitting - head 0.78 W/kg; body-worn 0.87 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Output power is ERP for Part 22 and EIRP for Part 24. This device contains 900 / 1800 MHz and WCDMA Band I functions that are not operational in U.S. Territories. Collocated transmitter operating configurations have been evaluated as described in this filing; other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. SAR compliance for body-worn operating configurations is limited to the specific configurations tested for this filing; body-worn operations are restricted to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 1.5 cm separation between the device and the user's body. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values for single- and co-transmit configurations under this FCC ID are: Part 15 - head 0.28 W/kg; body-worn 0.09 W/kg; Part 22 - head 0.54 W/kg; body-worn 0.78 W/kg; Part 24 - head 0.29 W/kg; body-worn 0.29 W/kg; co-transmitting - head 0.78 W/kg; body-worn 0.87 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Firm Name |
TCC Microsoft Salo
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Name |
K**** H******
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Telephone Number |
35871********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 | Fax Number |
45-33********
|
||||
1 2 3 4 5 6 |
k******@microsoft.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0450000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 24E | BC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.549 | 0.1 ppm | 300KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 24E | BC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.372 | 0.1 ppm | 300KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 3 | 22H | BC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.741 | 0.1 ppm | 300KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 4 | 22H | BC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.178 | 0.1 ppm | 300KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0007760 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
4 | 1 | 15B | CC | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
5 | 1 | 15C | CC | 2412.00000000 | 2462.00000000 | 0.0450000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 1 | 22H | BC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.741 | 0.1 ppm | 300KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 2 | 22H | BC | 824.2 | 848.8 | 0.178 | 0.1 ppm | 300KG7W | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 3 | 24E | BC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 1.549 | 0.1 ppm | 300KGXW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
6 | 4 | 24E | BC | 1850.2 | 1909.8 | 0.372 | 0.1 ppm | 300KG7W |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC